Home

DS6878-HC - Sklep SmartMedia

1. MAAT 21 Characters III 22 Characters UMM 23 Characters Au 24 Characters ICAL 25 Characters VAM MA 26 Characters dn WAT 27 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 19 Code Lengths continued 28 Characters 29 Characters 30 Characters Message Containing A Specific Data String Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string or contains a specific character or data string There are 4 features e Specific String at Start e Specific String Any Location e Any Message OK e Rule Belongs to Set Specific String at Start 1 Scan the following bar code 2 Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters up to a total of 8 using the Alphanumeric 3 Scan End of Message bar code on page 15 96 Keyboard on page 15 87 Specific String At Start 15 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Specific String Any Location 1 Scan the following bar code 2 Enter a location by scanning a two digit number representing the position use a leading zero if necessary using the Numeric Keypad on page 15 21
2. Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL ESC 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 F amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 N 1042 IJ k 1043 IK 1044 L 1045 gt 1046 1047 O 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 6 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1053 5 1054 6 1055 7 8 9 1056 1057 1058 IZ 1059 F 1060 G 1061 H o CO NI ol o A 1062 l 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 P P Vv x oi ml mol oi w e O mim OF oj D O z Z T zit O z Z T K S 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 6 15 Table 6 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued
3. Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Matrix 2 of 5 Any Length 14 58 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5 redundancy scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy 01h Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy 00h Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 01h Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 00h Symbologies 14 59 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 00h Korean 3 of 5
4. IBM AT Notebook V NOTE User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 5 Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type If the keyboard type is not listed see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 8 8 North American German Windows French Windows French Canadian Windows 95 98 French Canadian Windows XP 2000 Spanish Windows Italian Windows 8 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes continued Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows Portuguese Brazilian Windows Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown cha
5. Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default er lel RS 232 Host Types Standard 7 6 Baud Rate 9600 7 8 Parity Type None 7 9 Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 7 9 Data Bits ASCII Format 8 Bit 7 10 Check Receive Errors Enable 7 11 Hardware Handshaking None 7 11 Software Handshaking None 7 13 Host Serial Response Time out 2 sec 7 15 RTS Line State Low RTS 7 16 Beep on lt BEL gt Disable 7 16 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 7 17 Nixdorf Beep LED Options Normal Operation 7 18 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 7 18 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC AT amp IBM PC 8 4 Compatibles Country Types Country Codes North American 8 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 8 6 Keystroke Delay No Delay 8 7 Intra Keystroke Delay Disable 8 7 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 8 8 Caps Lock On Disable 8 8 Caps Lock Override Disable 8 9 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 8 9 Function Key Mapping Disable 8 10 FN1 Substitution Disable 8 10 Send and Make Break Send 8 11 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Standard Default Parameters Parameter Default ee IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address None Selected 9 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39
6. IAU Send GUI D VICAR Send GUI E VMN Send GUI F VICAR Send GUIG UMNO Send GUI H IC Send GUI I VIII Send GUI J Advanced Data Formatting 15 83 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued IAU Send GUI K VINO N Send GUI L ANANA Send GUI M AANA Send GUI N NANOA Send GUI O ANAN Send GUI P ANANA Send GUI Q 15 84 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued IAU Send GUIR 0 Send GUIS IAU Send GUI T AMAIA Send GUI U VINO Send GUI V VATE Send GUI W IAM Send GUI X Advanced Data Formatting 15 85 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI Y Send GUI Z Turn On Off Rule Sets Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off Turn On Rule Set 1 Turn On Rule Set 2 Turn On Rule Set 3 Turn On Rule Set 4 15 86 Symbol DS6878 Product Referenc
7. Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad Caps Lock On When enabled the digital scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock On Disable Caps Lock On Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 9 Caps Lock Override When enabled on AT or AT Notebook hosts the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key Therefore an A in the bar code is sent as an A no matter what the state of the keyboard s Caps Lock key Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock Override Disable Caps Lock Override Convert Wedge Data When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case Convert to Upper Case Convert to Lower Case No Convert 8 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences see Table 8 2 on page
8. AAA Send q du W i Send r AA Send s UL Send t AA Send u duu Send v UAT A Send w Advanced Data Formatting 15 61 Keyboard Characters continued VARTA Send x UAT Send y MAI Send z A UI Send VATA Send VAN Send VARTA Send Send ALT Characters 15 62 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Alt 2 Send Alt B Send Alt D Send Alt F Send Alt A Send Alt C Send Alt E Advanced Data Formatting 15 63 Send ALT Characters continued A Mt Send Alt G du W ll Send Alt H A M00 Send Alt I KANA Send Alt J AAN Send Alt K VITA Send Alt L VAM A Send Alt M 15 64 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send ALT Characters continued VATA Send Alt N VAM Send Alt O VARTA Send Alt P VIIA Send Alt Q du Walt Send Alt R A nt Send Alt S TT Send Alt T Advanced Dat
9. Disable Fuzzy 1D Processing 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 23 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter FOh 32h Select Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture Disable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off or Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code v NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5 16 enabled the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Decode Aiming Pattern is disabled Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern 02h Disable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern 00h Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF 03h 5 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decoding Illumination Parameter FOh 2Ah Selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the digital scanner to flash illumination to aid decoding Select Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using decoding illumination Enabling illumination usually results in superior images The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases Enable Decoding Illumination 01h Disable Decoding Illumination 00h
10. UA WAN Send Control J VAN Send Control K VATA Send Control L A Send Control M VATA AT Send Control N VATA Send Control O VMN Send Control P 15 46 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Conirol Q Send Control R Send Control S Send Control T Send Control U Send Control V Send Control W Advanced Data Formatting 15 47 Control Characters continued du il Send Control X III Send Control Y UA AAT Send Control Z AA Send Control UA MI Send Control A3 Al Send Control 15 48 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control 6 Send Control Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send Send Space Send Send Send Advanced Data Format
11. Send Keypad Numlock Send Break Key Send Delete Key Send Page Up Key Send End Key 15 70 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters continued Send Page Down Key Send Pause Key Send Scroll Lock Key Send Backspace Key Send Tab Key Send Print Screen Key Send Insert Key Advanced Data Formatting 15 71 Send Keypad Characters continued Send Home Key Send Enter Key Send Escape Key Send Up Arrow Key Send Down Arrow Key Send Left Arrow Key Send Right Arrow Key 15 72 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key
12. OCR Orientation 270 Clockwise 01h OCR Orientation 180 Clockwise 02h OCR Orientation 90 Clockwise 03h OCR Orientation Omnidirectional 04h 13 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Lines Parameter F1 B3h To select the number of OCR lines to decode scan one of the following bar codes Selecting Visas Passport TD1 or TD2 ID cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines Also see OCA B Variant on page 13 6 OCR 1 Line 001h OCR 2 Lines 002h OCR 3 Lines 003h OCR Minimum Characters Parameter F1 Bth To select the minimum number of OCR characters not including spaces per line to decode scan the following bar code then scan a three digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting representing the number of OCR characters to decode Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are ignored The default is 003 OCR Minimum Characters OCR Programming 13 13 OCR Maximum Cha
13. Pad Spaces To Length 27 Pad Spaces To Length 28 15 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 29 Pad Spaces To Length 30 Pad Data with Zeros Stop Pad Spaces To pad data to the left scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros Use Send commands to activate this parameter Pad Zeros To Length 1 Pad Zeros To Length 2 Pad Zeros To Length 3 Advanced Data Formatting 15 39 Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 4 Pad Zeros To Length 5 Pad Zeros To Length 6 Pad Zeros To Length 7 Pad Zeros To Length 8 Pad Zeros To Length 9 Pad Zeros To Length 10 15 40 Symbol DS6878 Product R
14. OCR B Visa Type A 09h OCR Programming 13 9 Enable Disable MICR E13B Parameter Fih AAh To enable or disable MICR E13B scan one of the following bar codes MICR E 13B uses the following characters 0423456 PAoti its TOAD characters Transit On Us Amount and Dash output as the following representative characters outputs as t outputs as a Il outputs as o nm Outputs as d Enable MICR E13B Disable MICR E13B 13 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable Disable US Currency Serial Number Parameter F1 ABh To enable or disable US Currency Serial Number scan one of the following bar codes Enable US Currency Disable US Currency OCR Orientation Parameter F1 AFh Select one of five options to specify the orientation of an OCR string to be read e 0 to the imaging engine default e 270 clockwise or 90 counterclockwise to the imaging engine e 180 upside down to the imaging engine e 90 clockwise to the imaging engine e Omnidirectional Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes OCR Programming 13 11 OCR Orientation continued OCR Orientation 0 00h
15. Disable CC A B 00h Symbologies 14 69 Composite TLC 39 Parameter FOh 73h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC 39 Enable TLC39 01h Disable TLC39 00h UPC Composite Mode Parameter FOh 58h Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol e Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected e Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion If 2D is not present the UPC bar code does not transmit e If you select Autodiscriminate UPC Composites the digital scanner determines if there is a 2D portion then transmits the UPC as well as the 2D portion if present UPC Never Linked 00h UPC Always Linked 01h Autodiscriminate UPC Composites 02h 14 70 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Composite Beep Mode Parameter FOh 8Eh To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded scan the appropriate bar code Single Beep after both are decoded 00h
16. Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded 00h Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN Parameter FOh 8Dh This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar 14 and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol Enable this to strip the leading 010 from DataBar 14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit and report the bar code as EAN 13 For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros this parameter strips the leading 0100 and reports the bar code as UPC A The UPC A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 01h Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 00h 14 68 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Composite Composite CC C Parameter FOh 55h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC C Enable CC C 01h Disable CC C 00h Composite CC A B Parameter FOh 56h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC A B Enable CC A B 01h
17. Send Next 13 Characters Send Next 14 Characters Send Next 15 Characters Send Next 16 Characters Send Next 17 Characters Send Next 18 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 27 Send Data continued Send Next 19 Characters Send Next 20 Characters Setup Field s Table 15 2 Setup Field s Definitions Parameter Description Page Move Cursor Move Cursor To a Character Scan the Move Cursor To Character on page 15 28 then any 15 28 printable ASCII character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15 87 This moves the cursor to the position after the matching character If the character is not there the rule fails and ADF tries the next rule Move Cursor to Start of Data Scan this bar code to move the cursor to the beginning of the data 15 28 Move Cursor Past a Character This action moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences of a 15 28 selected character For example if the selected character is A then
18. Pad Spaces To Length 10 Pad Spaces To Length 11 Pad Spaces To Length 12 Pad Spaces To Length 13 Pad Spaces To Length 14 15 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 15 Pad Spaces To Length 16 Pad Spaces To Length 17 Pad Spaces To Length 18 Pad Spaces To Length 19 Pad Spaces To Length 20 Pad Spaces To Length 21 Advanced Data Formatting 15 37 Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 22 Pad Spaces To Length 23 Pad Spaces To Length 24 Pad Spaces To Length 25 Pad Spaces To Length 26
19. 4001 PF 1 4002 PF2 4003 PF3 4004 PF 4 4005 PF5 4006 PF6 4007 PF7 4008 PF8 4009 PF9 4010 PF 10 4011 PF 11 4012 PF 12 4013 PF 13 4014 PF 14 4015 PF 15 4016 PF 16 Table F 6 F key Standard Default Table F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 F 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 6 F key Standard Default Table Continued F Keys Keystroke 5010 F 10 5011 F 11 5012 F 12 5013 F 13 5014 F 14 5015 F15 5016 F 16 5017 F17 5018 F 18 5019 F 19 5020 F 20 5021 F 21 5022 F 22 5023 F 23 5024 F 24 Table F 7 Numeric Key Standard Default Table Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 6043 6044 Undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 ASCII Character Sets F 11 Table F 7 Numeric Key Standard Default Table Continued 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 8 9 6056 6057 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock Table F 8 Extended Keypad Standard Default Table Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow
20. OCR A Reserved 2 02h OCR A Banking 03h OCR Programming 13 5 Enable Disable OCR B Parameter Eih A9h To enable or disable OCR B scan one of the following bar codes Enable OCR B Disable OCR B 13 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR B Variant Parameter F1 ADh OCR B has the following variants Selecting the most appropriate font variant affects performance and accuracy OCR B Full ASCII 1 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ N OCR B Banking 0123456789 lt gt JNP OCR B Limited 0123456789 lt gt ACENPSTVX OCR B Travel Document Version 1 TD1 3 Line ID Cards 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ OCR B Passport 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZN OCR B ISBN 10 Digit Book Numbers 0123456789 gt BCEINPSXz OCR B ISBN 10 or 13 Digit Book Numbers 0123456789 gt BCEINPSXz OCR B Travel Document Version 2 TD2 2 Line ID Cards 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ OCR B Visa Type A 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ OCR B Visa Type B 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZN To choose a variant scan one of the following bar codes Selecting the following OCR B variants automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines on page 13 12 These five variants invoke extensive speci
21. Disable Netherlands KIX Code 00h Symbologies 14 65 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail To enable or disable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail scan the appropriate bar code below Enable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 01h Disable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 00h UPU FICS Postal To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPU FICS Postal 01h Disable UPU FICS Postal 00h 14 66 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded and DataBar Limited The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 Parameter FOh 52h Enable GS1 DataBar 14 01h Disable GS1 DataBar 14 00h GS1 DataBar Limited Parameter FOh 53h Enable GS1 DataBar Limited 01h Disable GS1 DataBar Limited 00h Symbologies 14 67 GS1 DataBar Expanded Parameter FOh 54h Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded 01h
22. Beep as each code type is decoded 01h Double Beep after both are decoded 02h GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes Parameter FOh ABh Select whether to enable or disable this mode Enable GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes 01h Disable GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes 00h Symbologies 14 71 2D Symbologies Enable Disable PDF417 Parameter OFh To enable or disable PDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable PDF417 01h Disable PDF417 00h Enable Disable MicroPDF417 Parameter E3h To enable or disable MicroPDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MicroPDF417 01h Disable MicroPDF417 00h 14 72 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 128 Emulation Parameter 7Bh Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format on page 14 14 must be enabled for this parameter to work Enable Code 128 Emulation to trans
23. Birth Date 20 Send Enter Key 21 Save Driver s Licence Parse Rule Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 21 Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format Last Name First Name 1 Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule 2 Last Name 3 Send 4 Send Space 5 First Name 6 Save Driver s Licence Parse Rule 16 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Then in order to limit the full name to 15 characters create the following ADF rule 1 Begin New Rule 2 Criterion Parsed Driver s License 3 Action Send Next 15 Characters 4 Save Rule For a license belonging to Michael Williams the parsed data is Williams Michael and Williams Micha after applying the previous ADF rule Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 23 Field Update Procedure Scan the following bar codes in order to perform a field update This update COMPLETELY REPLACES prior updates and overrides any embedded parsing software programmed in the digital scanner Field Update Start 1 Scan Field Update Start
24. Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 K 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N a 1095 O _ 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C Cc 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L l 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 6 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S Ss 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X X 1121 Y y 1122 Z Z 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S i 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 6 17 Table 6 3 USB ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2
25. OCR Programming 13 15 OCR Bright Illumination Parameter Fih BDh When enabled image contrast is improved for OCR scanning Motorola recommends enabling this when the OCR string is longer than 20 characters and for applications with busy backgrounds such as passport check or VISA reading Enable OCR Bright Illumination Disable OCR Bright Illumination J NOTE Enabling OCR Bright Illumination causes the aiming pattern to blink due to the lower frame rate setting 13 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Template Parameter F1 23h This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format Carefully constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors To set or modify the OCR decode template scan the OCR Template bar code then bar codes corresponding to numbers and letters on the following pages to form the template expression Then scan End of Message in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting The default is 54R which accepts any character OCR strings OCR Template End of Message Required Digit 9 9 Only a numeric character is allowed in this position Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99999 12987 30517 123AB Required Alpha A Only an alpha
26. Medium Tone 01h High Tone 00h Medium to High Tone 2 tone 04h Dy 5 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beeper Volume Parameter 8Ch To select a beeper volume scan the Low Volume Medium Volume or High Volume bar code Low Volume 02h Medium Volume 01h High Volume 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options Beeper Duration Parameter F1 74h To select the duration for the beeper scan one of the following bar codes Short 00h Medium 01h Long 02h Beep on Insertion When a digital scanner is inserted into a cradle and detects power it emits a short low beep This feature is enabled by default To enable or disable beeping on insertion scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Beep on Insertion Disable Beep on Insertion ES 5 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Batch Mode The digital scanner supports three versions of batch mode When the digital scanner is configured for any of the batch modes it attempts to store bar code data not parameter bar codes until transmission is initialized or the m
27. Send K Send M Advanced Data Formatting 15 55 Keyboard Characters continued UA WAT Send N VAN Send O VARTA Send P UTI Send Q VARTA Send R VATA Send S du Il Send T 15 56 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send V Send X Send Z Send U Send W Send Y Send Advanced Data Formatting 15 57 Keyboard Characters continued UA WI Send AM Send VARTA Send 4 A WHO Send du E Send AA Senda du d Send b 15 58 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued VATA Send c DA Send d AA Send e NEO Send f AAT Send g du W Send h Arial Send i Advanced Data Formatting 15 59 Keyboard Characters continued VARTA Send j AA Mil Send k UA WU Send I A UA Send m UA Wl Send n AAN Send o VARTA Send p 15 60 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued
28. F 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide A Aperture The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit plus parity code representing 128 letters numerals punctuation marks and control characters It is a standard data transmission code in the U S Autodiscrimination The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code After this determination is made the information content is decoded B Bar The dark element in a printed bar code symbol Bar Code A pattern of variable width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine readable form The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin start character data or message character check character if any stop character and trailing margin Within this framework each recognizable symbology uses its own unique format See Symbology Bar Code Density The number of characters represented per unit of measurement e g characters per inch Bar Height The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width Bar Width Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar Bit Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The patte
29. Send F1 Key Send F3 Key Send F5 Key Send F7 Key Send F2 Key Send F4 Key Send F6 Key Advanced Data Formatting 15 73 Send Function Key continued A MI Send F8 Key VATA Send F9 Key A0 An dt Send F10 Key VATICAN Send F11 Key VAM Send F12 Key VATA Send F13 Key AA MII Send F14 Key 15 74 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key continued UA WH Send F15 Key A MA Send F16 Key du Wl Send F17 Key VIIA Send F18 Key VARTA Send F19 Key A MAN Send F20 Key du Wl Send F21 Key Advanced Data Formatting 15 75 Send Function Key continued A MA Send F22 Key UL Send F23 Key A MAI Send F24 Key VIANNA Send PF1 Key AAA Send PF2 Key du Wu
30. Beep LED After CTS Pulse Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an error beep sounds on the digital scanner Send Bar Code with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters RS 232 Interface 7 19 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 The values in Table 7 4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission Table 7 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Full ASCII SINT Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1000 U NUL 1001 A SOH 1002 B STX 1003 C ETX 1004 D EOT 1005 E ENQ 1006 F ACK 1007 G BELL 1008 H BCKSPC 1009 I HORIZ TAB 1010 J LF NW LN 1011 K VT 1012 L FF 1013 M CR ENTER 1014 N SO 1015 O SI 1016 P DLE 1017 Q DC1 XON 1018 R DC2 1019 S DC3 XOFF 1020 T DC4 1021 U NAK 1022 V SYN 1023 w ETB 1024 X CAN 1025 Y EM 1026 Z SUB 7 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 4 ASCII Character S
31. Control Characters continued UA WAN Send Control J VAN Send Control K VATA Send Control L A Send Control M VATA AT Send Control N VATA Send Control O VMN Send Control P Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 27 Control Characters continued Send Conirol Q Send Control R Send Control S Send Control T Send Control U Send Control V Send Control W 16 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control X Send Control Z Send Control Send Control Y Send Control Send Control Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 29 Control Characters continued Send Control 6 Send Control Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboar
32. None No check digit validation indicating no check digit is applied This is the default No Check Digit 00h Product Add Left to Right Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13 26 Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier and the sum of these products is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6 Product 1 6 6 16 25 36 Productadd 1 6 6 16 25 36 90 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 the remainder is zero Product Add Left to Right 03h 13 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of these products is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scan
33. cccscssseecrssssesesensaseeseseoeseenseseeesoesanenees 8 3 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters cccccssssscceessssoreesesseesesosoeseeesssoeesenssessesenoenenees 8 4 Keyboard Wedge Host Types sci eee EE 8 4 Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes ssssssssssseneeseeresserrsrerrrersnne 8 5 elteren E 8 6 Keystroke Delay aa age cee ca ees ose et ees ccc orci eae sore pace aban eee cece 8 7 Irma ergeet EE 8 7 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation c ecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensenseees 8 8 Gaps LocK EE 8 8 Caps Lock Override E 8 9 Convent Wedge Data EE 8 9 Function Key Mapping EE 8 10 FNI SUDSHTUTON EE 8 10 Send Make and Break EE 8 11 Keyboard Maps gn eee eee eee re ne ere ent eer eer eer ee eee ome eer eee eee ee eer 8 12 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge AAA 8 13 Chapter 9 IBM Interface IMTPOGU CON ZE 9 1 Connecting to an IBM 468X 469X Host A 9 2 IBM Parameter Delaulls cscxteccctvontciscecesvetieeeecticetineceieiees a aa aKa tee Gatien 9 3 IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters ccccccccccccceccscecceeeeceeeeeceueuceueeueeueuceueueeueaeeueueuuueaess 9 4 POR AOI ESS csssecsnc seis aoe te es ca een ee 9 4 Convert Unknown to Code 209 9 5 X Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Optional IBM Parameters gebeten ee EENEG 9 5 Ignore Bep WEE 9 5 Ignore Bar Code Configuration esessseseeeneeeenreesrtretstrrrnerrrnntrrnntsrnrrnserernsrren ne 9 6 Chapter 10 Wand Emulation Interface
34. l 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths l 2 of 5 Length Within Range 12 of 5 Any Length Symbologies 14 45 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Enable this feature to check the integrity of all 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification USS or the Optical Product Code Council OPCC check digit algorithm Disable 00h USS Check Digit 01h Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit OPCC Check Digit 02h Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Enable 01h Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 00h 14 46 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Enable this parameter to convert 14 character 2 of 5 codes to EAN 13 and transmit to the host as EAN 13 To accomplish this the 2 of 5 code must be enabled and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN 13 check digit Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Enable
35. Enable Disable Korean 3 of 5 To enable or disable Korean 3 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below lt J NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6 Enable Korean 3 of 5 01h Disable Korean 3 of 5 00h 14 60 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Inverse 1D This parameter sets the 1D inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h Symbologies 14 61 Postal Codes US Postnet To enable or disable US Postnet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Postnet 01h Disable US Postnet 00h US Planet To enable or disable US Planet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Planet 01h Disable US Planet 00h 14 62 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit US Postal Check Digit Select whether to transmit US Postal data which includes both US Postnet and US Planet with or without the check digit Transmit US Postal Che
36. Multicode Mode Parameter F1h A5h Enable this parameter to allow multiple bar codes to decode upon one trigger event based on the programmed multicode expression The digital scanner reports a successful decode and provides user indication only if it decodes all bar codes indicated by the multicode expression otherwise the decode fails Bar codes are transmitted in the order defined in the multicode expression Disable this to operate in normal decode mode When using this mode disable Continuous Bar Code Read on page 5 19 and always orient the digital scanner at the same distance and angle perpendicular Disable Multicode Mode 00h Enable Multicode Mode 01h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 25 Multicode Expression Parameter F1h 95h Use this feature to program a multicode expression for Multicode Mode grid method The default is 1 which indicates any bar code To set the multicode expression 1 Scan the bar code below 2 Scan bar codes from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting to define the expression 3 Scan the End of Message bar code from Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting Multicode Expression Multicode Expression Syntax n Element 1 Element 2 Element n Where e nis the number of elements in the overall expression The multicode expression describes the bar code s that the digit
37. Send Pause Advanced Data Formatting 15 29 Skip Ahead Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters Skip Ahead 1 Character Skip Ahead 2 Characters Skip Ahead 3 Characters Skip Ahead 4 Characters Skip Ahead 5 Characters Skip Ahead 6 Characters Skip Ahead 7 Characters 15 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Skip Ahead continued Skip Ahead 8 Characters Skip Ahead 9 Characters Skip Back Skip Ahead 10 Characters Use the following bar codes to skip back characters Skip Back 1 Character Skip Back 2 Characters Skip Back 3 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 31 Skip Back continued Skip
38. Table 8 4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set Continued GUI Keys Keystrokes 3054 GUI6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUIA 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUIE 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUIJ 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUIO 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUIS 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z 8 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 5 Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 21 Table 8 6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 R 6043 6044 undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock 8 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke
39. lt len gt None lt len gt lt len gt 1 Code 93 None None L L L lt len gt None None D2o0f5 H lt len gt None H H H lt len gt H lt len gt 2 GS1 128 L lt len gt None P P P lt len gt L lt len gt 5 MSI None None O O O lt len gt None None Bookland EAN F F A A A F None Trioptic None None None None None None None Code 11 None None None None None None None IATA H lt len gt None H H None None 2 Code 32 None None None None None None None GS1 Databar None None E E None None None Variants PDF417 None None Q Q None None 6 Datamatrix None None None None None None 4 QR Codes None None None None None None 7 Aztec Aztec Rune None None None None None None 8 7 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide RS 232 Host Types To select an RS 232 host interface scan one of the following bar codes Standard RS 232 ICL RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode A Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode B Olivetti ORS4500 RS 232 Interface 7 7 Omron OPOS JPOS Fujitsu RS 232 SITA CUTE 7 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Baud Rate Baud rate is the number of bits of
40. to all Code 32 bar codes i NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Code 32 Prefix 01h Disable Code 32 Prefix 00h 14 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 39 Parameter L1 12h L2 13h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 39 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options v NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types enter a leading zero for single digit numbers One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 39 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error o
41. 01h Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 00h Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Enable Disable Discrete 2 of 5 To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Discrete 2 of 5 01h Disable Discrete 2 of 5 00h Symbologies 14 47 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range The range for Discrete 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Ca
42. 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 F amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 l 1042 IJ i 1043 IK 1044 L 5 1045 1046 1047 O 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 15 Table 8 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued me Code 39 eme E 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 IZ 1059 oF 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 K l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 8 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII ee Code 39 Encode Character A 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 K 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N A 1095 O 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 l i 1The keystroke in bold is se
43. 2 Scan the entire set of PDF bar codes provided separately 3 Scan Field Update End Field Update End Scan Erase all Field Updates to completely remove all previous updates It is not necessary to scan this bar code before performing a normal field update Scanning this bar code ensures that only the parsing software currently in the digital scanner is used for parsing Erase all Field Updates 16 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide User Preferences Set Default Parameter Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A 1 on page A 1 Set All Defaults Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters Control Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send Send Control A Send Control B Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 25 Control Characters continued Send Control C Send Control D Send Control E Send Control F Send Conirol G Send Control H Send Control I 16 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide
44. 2 1 1 e scene eee ee 8 3 transmit check digit eee ein ate oe 14 59 radio communication 4 2 maxicode bar codes 000 anann 14 74 RS 232 Oe eee ee ea 7 3 microPDF417 bar codes o n 14 71 scanner emulation 0 5 11 3 mounting DE Eege Salers Gee e ae ER 6 3 TEE 1 8 user preferences 5 2 MSI bar codes wand emulation 10 3 check digit algorithm 000 14 55 parameters check dote 14 54 batch mode sss sees 5 10 5 11 lengthS 14 52 battery reconditioning 1 10 MSI ok xe bodice d NA AN cde vue nh 14 52 beep on insertion n a auaa uaaa 5 9 transmit check dot 14 54 Bluetooth technology support 4 8 multipoint to point communication 4 18 IBM 468X 469X 6 eee 9 4 keyboard wedge 00 eee eee eee 8 4 radio communication 4 4 4 5 auto reconnect interval 0 4 14 batch mode 5 10 5 11 connection maintenance interval 4 23 host types 4 4 4 5 Pairing eenaa ee eee 4 19 parameter broadcast 4 19 reconnect attempt beep 4 14 reconnect attempt interval 4 15 RS 3282 casita Eee ee lead wet ai 7 4 scanner to cradle support 4 18 set defaults 5 4 time delay to reduced power mode 5 13 HDD se skein 8 H cae ation eee 4 21 USB yc Zuse sue e peek eee eee eed ee 6 4 wand emulation 2 2
45. Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 3 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued amp E 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued lt gt Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 5 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued A D E 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued J NOTE The bar codes that follow should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad 0 1 2 3 4 5 Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 7 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued MI 6 IM 7 MI 8 OI 9 Au End of Message Cancel E 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Ou A Ou B IAM C Ou D Ou E E Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 9 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued G H l J K L E 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued IL M PA N Or o PAN P Ou Q R Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 11 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued OI S NA T OI U N Vv OI Ww X E 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued OI Y MA Z Ou a OM b AN c d Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 13 Alpha
46. Remove the digital scanner and cradle from their respective packing and inspect for damage If the digital scanner or cradle was damaged in transit contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support See page xix for contact information KEEP THE PACKING It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be returned for servicing Getting Started Parts Scanner Battery Door Latch Metal Charging Contacts Figure 1 2 Parts of the Digital Scanner e 1 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Cradle Pairing Bar Code Convertible Mount Hook Charging LED Latch Latch Charging Communications Contacts Figure 1 3 Cradle Front View Mounting Hole Rubber Foot Rubber Foot Power Cable Hook Host Cable Hook Power Port Host Cable Groove Power Cable Groove Desk Wall Mount Mounting Hole Figure 1 4 Cradle Back View Getting Started Loz 1 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner Cradle The digital scanner cradle serves as a stand charger and host interface for the digital scanner The cradle sits on a desktop or mounts on a vertical surface Such as a wall For more information about mounting options and procedures refer to the documentation included with the cradle There are two versions of the cradle e Charging cradle with radio When the cordless digital scanner is paired to the cradle all communication between the digital s
47. Send j Send Send n Send p Send k Send m Send o Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 41 Keyboard Characters continued AAA Send q du W i Send r AA Send s UL Send t AA Send u duu Send v UAT A Send w 16 42 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send x Send z Send Send Send y Send Send Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 43 Keyboard Characters continued Send Tab Key Send Enter Key 16 44 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Radio Communications Bluetooth Host Host Type Cradle Host Discoverable Mode General Country Keyboard Types Country Code North American HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay 0 msec CAPS Lock Override Disable Ignore Unknown Characters Enable Emulate Keypad Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable Function Key Mapping Disable Simulated Caps Lock Disable Convert Case No Case Conversion Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable Reconnect Attempt Interv
48. To disable the decoding of parameter bar codes including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes scan the Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below To enable decoding of parameter bar codes scan Enable Parameter Scanning Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 01h Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 00h Beep After Good Decode Parameter 38h Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the digital scanner beeps after a good decode If selecting Do Not Beep After Good Decode the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions Beep After Good Decode Enable 01h Do Not Beep After Good Decode Disable 00h 5 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Suppress Power Up Beeps Parameter F1h D1h Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to suppress digital scanner beeps upon power up Do Not Supress Power Up Beeps 00h Supress Power Up Beeps 01h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options Beeper Tone Parameter 91h To select a decode beep frequency tone scan one of the following bar codes Off 03h Low Tone 02h
49. ceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeees 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeenseseeeeeneeeeeeeees 4 10 HID CAPS Lock Override EE 4 10 HID Ignore Unknown Characters sersccsercciceraciagesssennsannverexncasatendardbiancersbeeaadpeaneceniese 4 11 Emulate Keypad ccscxrasSusteicatcvcontcuteartetantctenaadts na a a a 4 11 HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution NEE 4 12 HID Function Key Mapping BE 4 12 Sim l ted Caps De 4 13 Table of Contents vii Rene 4 13 A to reconnect POALUNG rh scincesccesssrsncretebaxnenvucansucgueeaedasuasanunccteeenieaudebdetaauvasteeaieuaneees 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback cccceseseecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeneeesseseeeeeeeneees 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Interval eeneg eege 4 15 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode 0 4 17 Out of Range E 4 17 Digital Scanner s To Cradle Support EE 4 18 Modes f Operation eg 4 18 Point to Point Communication saccectcctadenssanicssoncstatnatdcnnsiaiotecvestaammisemancndecententade 4 18 Multipoint to Point Communication sccccsccoctsdccens sixccdeatoinentoniiensecetanidenuedarenasnees 4 18 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only sssssssssesesssneessserrssrrrnrerrnnrernnrnsserrnserrnne 4 19 Pairing eeii aaas Sanaa a a ENa S aaa aAA SA Aaa aAA 4 19 Pairing Modes EE 4 20 ele CC 4 20 Eur Methods eege 4 21 MUNA MWY celeste ten seed Accra eessen 4 21 Pairing Bar Code Format eer et
50. lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 06h lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 07h FN1 Substitution Values Key Category Parameter 67h Decimal Value Parameter 6Dh The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character 0x1b in an EAN128 bar code with a value This value defaults to 7013 Enter Key When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value set the key category parameter to 1 then set the 3 digit keystroke value See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus Set FN1 Substitution Value 2 Locate the keystroke desired for ENT Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface Enter the 4 digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes 1 Scan the bar code below To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 5 38 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 39 Transmit No Read Message Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message Enable t
51. 3 Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters up to a total of 8 using the Alphanumeric 4 Scan End of Message bar code on page 15 96 Keyboard on page 15 87 Specific String Any Location Any Message OK Do not scan any bar code to format all selected code types regardless of information contained Advanced Data Formatting 15 21 Numeric Keypad Do not confuse bar codes on this page with those on the alphanumeric keyboard MMM 0 TI 1 AU 2 d 3 AUT 4 ll 5 6 15 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numeric Keypad continued 7 8 9 Cancel Advanced Data Formatting 15 23 Rule Belongs To Set Select the set to which a rule belongs There are four possible rule sets See Alternate Rule Sets on page 15 3 for more information about rule sets Rule Belongs To Set 1 Rule Belongs To Set 2 Rule Belongs To Set 3 Rule Belongs To Set 4 15 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Actions Select how to format the data for transmission Send Data Send all data that remains send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15 87 or send the nex
52. 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow Chapter 9 IBM Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an IBM 468X 469X host computer Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks of Zear Disabl nver Indicates Default EE Feature Option 9 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting to an IBM 468X 469X Host J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host interface Interface Cable Host Port Connector Figure 9 1 BM Direct Connection To connect the IBM 46XX interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cables to the Cr
53. DS6878 DL 16 35 Keyboard Characters continued VATA A Send G du ul Send H III Send VATICAN Send J OAN Send K VATA Send L VAN Send M 16 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued VITA Send N VAN Send O VARTA Send P UTI Send Q VARTA Send R VATA Send S du Il Send T Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 37 Keyboard Characters continued AA Send U VARTA Send V VATA LI Send W VMI Send X AAT Send Y VATA Send Z AA Mul Send 16 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued UA WI Send AM Send VARTA Send 4 A WHO Send du E Send AA Senda du d Send b Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 39 Keyboard Characters continued VAAN Send c DA Send d AA Send e NEO Send f AAT Send g du W Send h Arial Send i 16 40 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued
54. Parameter FOh 26h To enable or disable Maxicode scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Maxicode 01h Disable Maxicode 00h OR Code Parameter FOh 25h To enable or disable QR Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable QR Code 01h Disable QR Code 00h Symbologies 14 75 OR Inverse Parameter F1h 4Bh This parameter sets the QR inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular QR bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse QR bar codes only Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse QR bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h MicroOR Parameter F1h 3Dh To enable or disable MicroQR scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MicroQR 01h Disable MicroQR 00h 14 76 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Aztec Parameter F1h 3Eh To enable or disable Aztec scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Aztec 01h Disable Aztec 00h Aztec Inverse Parameter F1h 4Dh This parameter sets the Aztec inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes onl
55. RS 232 connection 7 2 RS 232 defaults 7 3 RS 232 parameters 7 4 S sample bar codes Code KEE C 2 COdG39 REENEN C 1 GS1 DataBar 0 0 ee C 3 interleaved 2oib eee eee C 2 UPC EAN eege we be Pen chee ead C 1 scanner emulation defaults 11 3 Scanner parses a eiiieaen o eee ee eens 1 3 scanner to cradle support 4 18 scanner s to cradle support 4 18 SCANNING st e stags eee e badge nee bese eew es 2 5 GIOS aa oe Hate ww oa Ea 5 2 6 8 8 6 14 2 radio communications sequence example 4 1 sequence example 5 2 14 1 Scanning LED nawet dasa weed ae doe te E e 2 3 Serial Port Profile 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 4 6 Serial Port Profile master 4 4 4 14 4 19 Serial Port Profile slave 4 4 service Information xix setup connecting a USB interface 6 2 connecting an RS 232 interface 7 2 connecting keyboard wedge interface 8 2 connecting to an IBM 468X 469X host 9 2 connecting using wand emulation 10 2 11 2 ee 1 6 inserting scanner in cradle 1 11 installing the cable n a naana anaana 1 6 mounting cradle 1 8 SCANNEN ege SEE EE Suma EE 1 6 supplying power 000 ee eee eee 1 7 unpacking 1 2 signal descriptions 3 10 Slave EE 3 4 4 4 4 6 specifications 3 7 E EE 4 6 SPP mastr Ae dE SIN Ne EE AN 4 4 4 14 4 19 SPP slave 3 EE de
56. See Chapter 14 Symbologies Bar code symbol is unreadable Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Possible Causes Distance between digital scanner and bar code is incorrect Possible Solutions Move the digital scanner closer to or further from the bar code See Decode Ranges on page 2 7 The scan line is not crossing every bar and space of the symbol Move the symbol until the scan line is within the acceptable aiming pattern See Figure 2 1 on page 2 5 Digital Scanner decodes bar code but does not transmit the data to the host Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct host type Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code See the chapter corresponding to the host type Interface cable is loose Ensure all cable connections are secure Cradle is not programmed for the correct host interface Check digital scanner host parameters or edit options Digital Scanner not paired to host connected interface Pair the digital scanner to the cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Cradle has lost connection to host In this exact order disconnect power supply disconnect host cable wait three seconds reconnect host cable reconnect power supply reestablish pairing D
57. Use the following suggestions if encountering problems programming a multicode expression e Ensure the expression is valid Invalid expressions are rejected during programming When an expression is rejected the previous expression remains intact If after programming the expression the digital scanner can still decode any bar code the expression was possibly rejected e When programming the multicode expression via parameter bar code the digital scanner generates beeps If any of the following beeps do not sound during programming an error occurred see Table 2 1 on page 2 1 and Table 2 2 on page 2 3 for error indicators e Scanning the Multicode Expression bar code produces a two tone same pitch beep e Scanning each value of the expression produces a two tone same pitch beep e Scanning the End Of Message bar code produces a four tone high low high low beep e Check the expression for syntax errors e Try programming a simple expression to ensure the syntax is correct See Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions e Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5 26 for additional hints Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding Use the following suggestions if encountering problems using multicode mode e Ifthe digital scanner appears to decode any single bar code instead of the intended multiple bar codes ensure you enabled Multicode Mode on page 5 24 Programming the multicode expression does not enable mul
58. entering the name s NOTE f your application allows you to set a device name this takes precedence over the Bluetooth Friendly Name Bluetooth Friendly Name Discoverable Mode Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery e Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC e Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobile device e g Motorola Q and the device does not appear in General Discoverable Mode Note that it can take longer to discover the device in this mode The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds and green LEDs flash while in this mode It is then non discoverable To re active Limited Discoverable Mode press the trigger General Discoverable Mode Limited Discoverable Mode 4 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Host Parameters The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile In this mode the digital scanner can interact with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID profile as a Bluetooth keyboard Scanned data is transmitted to the host as keystrokes Following are the keyboard parameters supported by the HID host HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type North American Standard Keyboards French Windows German
59. idee Tele EE 10 1 Connecting Using Wand Emulation E 10 2 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults 10 3 Wand Emulation Host Parameters cccccceccceeceee cece eee e eee e eee e eee eegeeeeeegeeeneeseseeeeeesneeees 10 4 Wand Emulation Host Types sicccccccu tavemercesczacssueccbsacteaateastasttranrentanataleenckentseeacbeude 10 4 Leading Margin Lee 10 5 ee 10 6 Ignore Unknown EE 10 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 scoccteti eege 10 7 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII unt ededuetesgeen iere deeg EES 10 8 Chapter 11 Scanner Emulation Interface Connecting Using Scanner Emulation 20 0 0 cc cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaes 11 2 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults 11 3 Scanner Emulation HOSt oo cece ccccceeecccceeeeeceesueeeeceeueeeeueessaueeeeeseueuaeeeueenaeeeeneneeeeneaes 11 3 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters cccccccccsseseeceeceeeseseeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeaeaeeeeeeeeeneees 11 4 EE heeten 11 4 Parameter PassS ee e E 11 5 Convert Newer Code Types ENEE 11 6 Module Width sessesesssnnnenesseesrrrrnrrreresnsrrnrrrrreurrsrrrrrititurerrrrrrrrtrt erer ra rnrn rernere rrer rrrree 11 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 20 11 7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion oo ccccccccceeeecceceeeeeceeseeeeuseeseaeueeeeeeeaeeeeeasaneeenea 11 7 Transmission HIMCOUL tege e e gees 11 8 Ignore Unknown Characters EE 11 9 Leading RA e Un WEE 11 9 Check For Decode LED pesenan aaa E EE 11 10 Chapter 12 123Scan2 luuten len E
60. or by pairing with a cradle For radio communication parameters detailed information about operational modes Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and pairing see Chapter 4 Radio Communications Configuring the Digital Scanner Use the bar codes in this manual or the 123Scan configuration program to configure the digital scanner See Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options for information about programming the digital scanner using bar code menus Also see each host specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type See Chapter 12 123Scan2 to configure the digital scanner using this configuration program Getting Started 1 15 Accessories The digital scanner and cradle accessories that are available separately include e Power supplies for applications that do not supply power over the host cable See each host interface chapter for set up information e Wall mount bracket for mounting the cradle vertically Refer to the CRO078 S CR0008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 135874 xx for a wall mounting template and installation instructions e Lanyard for wearing the digital scanner on a wrist Lanyard The lanyard attaches to the inside of the digital scanner battery door latch Figure 1 10 Attached Lanyard To attach the lanyard 1 Open the battery door latch as described in Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 9 Do not remove the battery 1 16 Symbol DS6878 P
61. the cursor moves past A AA AAA etc Scan the Move Cursor Past Character on page 15 28 then select a character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15 87 lf the character is not there the cursor does not move i e has no effect Skip Ahead N Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions ahead 15 29 to move the cursor Skip Back N Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions back to 75 30 move the cursor Send Preset Value Send Values 1 through 6 by scanning the appropriate bar code Set 15 30 these values using the prefix suffix values in Table 7 4 on page 7 19 Value 1 Scan Suffix Value 2 Scan Prefix Values 3 6 are not applicable 15 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Move Cursor Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character Then enter a character by scanning a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15 87 J NOTE f there is no match and the rule fails the next rule is checked Move Cursor To Character Move Cursor To Start Move Cursor Past Character Send Pause Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data See Pause Duration on page 15 8 to set the length of this pause
62. 1 The Code 128 Scanning Rule Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication 1 Begin New Rule 15 8 High High 2 Code 128 15 11 High High 3 Send next 5 characters 15 25 High High 4 Send lt CTRL M gt 15 45 High High 5 Send next 5 characters 15 25 High High 6 Send lt CTRL P gt 15 45 High High 7 Send next 2 characters 15 24 High High 8 Send lt CTRL D gt 15 44 High High 9 Save Rule 15 8 High Low High Low Rule 2 The UPC Scanning Rule Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication 1 Begin New Rule 15 8 High High 2 UPC EAN 15 13 High High 3 Send all remaining data 15 24 High High 4 Send lt CTRL M gt 15 45 High High 5 Save Rule 15 8 High Low High Low To correct any errors made while entering this rule scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 15 9 If you already saved the rule scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 15 9 Alternate Rule Sets You can group ADF rules into one of four alternate sets which you can turn on and off when needed This is useful to format the same message in different ways For example a Code 128 bar code contains the following information Class 2 digits Stock Number 8 digits Price 5 digits The bar code might look like this 245671243701500 where Class 24 Stock Number 56712437 Price 01500 Ordinarily data is sent as follows 24 class key 56712437 stock key 01500 enter key But when there is a sale send only the following 24 class key 56712437 sto
63. 11 check digit s Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Enable 01h Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Disable 00h J NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Enable Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 01h Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 00h Symbologies 14 43 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this op
64. 128 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234 Interleaved 2 of 5 12345678901231 Sample Bar Codes C 3 GS1 DataBar J NOTE GS1 DataBar variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below see GS1 DataBar on page 14 66 102938475601 92837465019283746029478450366523 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked 1234890hjio9900mnb GS1 DataBar Expanded 08672345650916 GS1 DataBar Limited C 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar 14 UT AIM MIM NA AT 55432198673467 GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated a 9087652341 2674 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked i 78123465709811 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni Directional PDF417 i U i Data Matrix Sample Bar Codes C 5 Maxicode of x2 Zo ol Hanes OR Code US Postnet Weve l Deal la lach daa Qld gd UK Postal Jl A AN eel fy D VAN du ABCDLAB C 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes D 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numeric Bar Codes For parameters requiring specific numeric values scan the appropriately numbered bar code s 0 1 2 3 4 5 Numeric Bar Codes D 3 6 7 8 9 Cancel To correct an error or change a selection scan the bar code below Cancel D 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes Alphanumeric Keyboard Space D E 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide
65. 13 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features Before programming follow the instructions in To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces do not merge Select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values Indicates Defaut Enable UPC A Feature Option Oth WOU see Option Hex Value Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to transmit bar code data without the UPC A check digit simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit bar code under The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 require scanning s
66. 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy c ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeeeteees 14 13 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format EE 14 14 Transmit UPG A Check Re E 14 14 Transmit UPC E Check le UE 14 15 Transmit e Re A Re EE 14 15 UPCA Preamble eene eebe 14 16 PGE Preamble E 14 17 LIEGE Preamble eebe ee ENEE EE Ee 14 18 Convert UPC E E 14 19 Convert UP C2 1 to UPG A E 14 19 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend ebe 14 20 Bookland ISBN Format E 14 21 UCC ere 14 22 C upon Report EE 14 23 ISSN EAN ee 14 24 G de E 14 25 Enable Disable Code ee 14 25 Set Lengths for Code 128 EE 14 25 Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCCEAN 12801 14 26 Enable Disable ISBT 128 EE 14 27 EEN WEE TE 14 28 Check ISBT TADS sisestamine E EE a an a EEEa Si 14 29 ISBT Concatenation E ie EE 14 29 Code 3O eebe eege 14 30 Enable Disable Code 209 14 30 Enable Disable Trioptic Code 39 4sci ccch ese aciscete eliza Mle ci cde Otek 14 30 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 ENEE 14 31 EE eet 14 31 Set Lengths for Code 39 E 14 32 Code 39 Check Digit Verification EE 14 33 Transmit Code 39 Check Ee DEE 14 33 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion E 14 34 Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store steigert eege EES 14 34 Buffer Data EE Ee 14 35 Clear Transmission RE 14 35 Transmit E 14 36 Overfilling Transmission Buffer 3 04 ence ccktte ks ecetivedang sacs ives eeeteristerdereetec ye nctbid 14 36 Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeseeeeeseeeneeees 14 36 Gode EE
67. 14 37 Enable Disable Code 03 14 37 Set Lengths for Code a ar teeta cs ees ah ce eed eee ees 14 37 Code Ti eres eee eee re eer ee eee eee ee ne ey eer er ee ree 14 39 Code Ti E 14 39 Set Lengths for Code 11 E 14 39 Code 11 Check Digit Verification egetkieun EE deg besen 14 41 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits sciciccisccaisenctannsntancntsaceerscressantarsentsasencssannanvndeteedasiden 14 42 interleaved 2 of 5 TF amiinien EN E ENE 14 42 Enable Disable Interleaved 2 ofb 14 42 Table of Contents xili Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 cccc cicsisaiertcncatatarcntcennnaaesbecenteneshaendecanentadenaeaieantte 14 43 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification siecczcrseancecvascicenieseecsuanterecnsvennetue bees eeencteegedouedvanuas 14 45 Transmit 2 of 5 Check e E 14 45 Conven 2 0f 5 t0 EAN e E 14 46 Discrete 2 0f 5 DTF arsonists eee nesip inea aaan ai a ae ene ee eee eee ore 14 46 Enable Disable Discrete 2 ofb nnmnnn nnmnnn 14 46 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 cccccccccceessesseeeeeeeeeeseseeneeeeeeeeeesessneseeeeeeeessssnaaeees 14 47 C dabar NW 7 E 14 49 Enable Disable Codabar E 14 49 Set Lengths e EE 14 49 CESI EE 14 51 NOTIS Editing EE 14 51 MSi ea a cee ea peat gh da a a a e eco cee 14 52 Enable Disable MSI RE 14 52 Set Lengths for gesteet 14 52 MSI Check Re EE 14 54 Transmit MSI Check Digit S EE 14 54 MSI Check Digit Algorithm siccse ces setecicese see vacdeaneiasisntedcastrnassuederstieasGiecsmteesianesvidcentans 14 55
68. 5 32 multicode mode 5 24 5 25 multicode mode concatenation 5 31 multicode troubleshooting 5 33 Netherlands KIX code 14 64 numeric bar codes D 3 OCR bright illumination 13 15 check don 13 25 check digit multiplier 13 26 check digit validation 13 27 default table 00 000 13 2 MMOS 24 sa EE tod ae te Rah ede 13 12 maximum characters 4 13 13 MICR EIS Bit etc ate dae hee Eer 13 9 minimum chararacter 13 12 OCRA EE 13 3 OCR A variant a nn auauua aaan 13 3 OGR B teg er dee eee AEN 13 5 OCR B variant eee 13 6 Ofentation EEN 13 10 parameters 13 3 Quiet zone 20 0 2 e eee eee 13 14 security level 000 0 ec eee 13 13 SUDSEL starve ea weed deh need tbat 13 14 template 13 16 US currency serialnumber 13 10 parameter broadcast aaaea naaa 4 19 parameter scanning 00 e eee 5 5 parser version ID 16 16 PDF prioritization 2 0000 5 18 PDF prioritization timeout 5 18 NEID RE 14 71 picklist modes 5 16 postal puck va cid Aha kee AC Pe ates Bede 14 61 prefix suffix values 5 36 QR COde aaea oea en tedes doe e eee need 14 74 QR inverse 2 000 cece e eee 14 75 radio output power 4 19 reconnect attempt beep 4 14 reconnect attempt interval 4 15 RS 232 baudrate
69. 8 13 When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Enable Function Key Mapping Disable Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution When enabled the digital scanner replaces FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a keystroke chosen by the user see ENT Substitution Values on page 5 38 Enable FN1 Substitution Disable FN1 Substitution Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 11 Send Make and Break When enabled the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent Send Make and Break Scan Codes Send Make Scan Code Only 8 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Maps Refer to the following keyboard map for prefix suffix keystroke parameters To program the prefix suffix values see the bar codes on page 5 36 a S P Els EEEE ele mag g GE Li Ibiza CL BEER J J UOL L CL IC bel L JO JOE eae EZ NY Figure 8 2 BM PS2 Type K
70. Back 4 Characters Skip Back 5 Characters Skip Back 6 Characters Skip Back 7 Characters Skip Back 8 Characters Skip Back 9 Characters Skip Back 10 Characters 15 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Preset Value Use these bar codes to send preset values See Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 36 to set these values Send Prefix Send Suffix Modify Data Modify data as described below The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule Programming pad zeros to length 6 send next 3 characters stop padding send next 5 characters adds three zeros to the first send and the next send is unaffected by the padding These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send Preset Value options Remove All Spaces To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow scan the bar code below Remove All Spaces Crunch All Spaces To leave one space between words scan the bar code below This also removes
71. Codabar Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 14 50 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Codabar continued Codabar One Discrete Length Codabar Two Discrete Lengths Codabar Length Within Range Codabar Any Length Symbologies 14 51 CLSI Editing Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first fifth and tenth characters of a 14 character Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format J NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters Enable CLSI Editing 01h Disable CLSI Editing 00h NOTIS Editing Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format Enable NOTIS Editing 01h Disable NOTIS Editing 00h 14 52 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide MSI Enable Disable MSI To enable or disable MSI scan the appropriate
72. Code 39 for Wand Host Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host 10 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII By default any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If this parameter is enabled the data sent to the wand interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII This setting requires that the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Chapter 11 Scanner Emulation Interface This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a digital scanner emulation host With digital scanner emulation the cradle connects either to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point of Sale POS terminal Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks 5 _ Parameter Process R Ge and Pass Through Salone SEN Indicates Default 11 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Scanner Emulation J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about scanner cradle pairing an
73. Code Type Near Far 3 mil Code 39 0 6 3 4 5 mil Code 39 FOV 4 9 13 mil 100 UPC 1 2 6 8 4 mil PDF 0 9 2 8 10 mil Data Matrix 0 6 4 2 Figure 2 6 DS6878 HD Decode Ranges 2 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 3 Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Introduction This chapter provides suggested digital scanner and cradle maintenance troubleshooting technical specifications and signal descriptions pinouts Maintenance Digital Scanner Cleaning the exit window is required A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy e Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window e Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth e Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia water e Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window The DS6878 HC design allows safe cleansing of the product plastics with a variety of cleaning products and disinfectants If required wipe the digital scanner with the following list of approved cleansers Super Sani Cloth Wipes e Clorox Bleach Windex Antimicrobial e Cavi Wipes e Isopropyl 70 80 Virex 5 Wipes e Ethanol 80 e Gentle dish soap and water 3 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Cradle e Do not pour spray or spill any liquid on the cradle Wipe cradle using approved cleansers CAUTION Avoid using cleansers directly on the digital scanner battery door contacts and cradle contacts Use
74. Disable 9 5 Ignore Beep Disable 9 5 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 9 6 Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface 10 4 Controller Leading Margin 80 msec 10 5 Polarity Bar High Margin Low 10 6 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 10 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 10 7 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 10 8 Scanner Emulation Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 11 4 Parameter Pass Through Parameter Process and Pass 11 5 Through Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 11 6 Module Width 20 us 11 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to 11 7 Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 11 7 Transmission Timeout 3 sec 11 8 Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 11 9 Leading Margin 2 ms 11 9 Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 11 10 123Scan Configuration Tool None 12 1 123Scan Configuration 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 5 A 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default ee OCR Programming Parameters OCR A Disable 13 3 OCR A Variant Full ASCII 13 3 OCR B Disable 13 5 OCR B Variant Full ASCII 13 6 MICR E13B Disable 13 9 US Currency Disable 13 10 OCR Orientation 0 13 10 OCR Lines 1 13 12 O
75. Enable Low Power Mode 01h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 13 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode Parameter 92h This parameter sets the time it takes the digital scanner to enter reduced power mode after any scanning activity Scan the appropriate bar code below to set the time 500 msecs 100 msecs 1 sec 2 secs 3 secs 4 secs 5 secs 5 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim Parameter Eih D9h This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains in auto aim before entering low power mode Disabled 5 secs 15 secs 30 secs 1 minute User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 15 Hand Held Trigger Mode Parameter 8Ah Select one of the following trigger modes for the digital scanner e Standard Level A trigger pull activates decode processing Decode processing continues until the bar code decodes you release the trigger or the Decode Session Timeout occurs e Presentation Blink The digital scanner activates decode processing when it detects a bar code in its field of view After a period of non use the digital scanner enters a low power mode in which the LEDs turn off un
76. First Name dd Middle Name Initial PU ANAM Name Suffix dd Name Prefix 16 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 2 Mailing Address City Mailing Address State Mailing Address Postal Code Home Address Line 1 Home Address Line 2 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 9 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Home Address City Home Address State Home Address Postal Code License ID Number License Class License Restrictions License Endorsements 16 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Height Feet and or Inches Height Centimeters Weight Pounds Weight Kilograms Eye Color Hair Color License Expiration Date Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 11 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Birth Date Gender License Issue Date Social Security Number Permit Class Permit Expiration Date Permit ID Number 16 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Permit Issue Date Permit Restrictions Permit Endors
77. H h 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L l 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S Ss 1116 T t RS 232 Interface 7 23 Table 7 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X D 1121 Y y 1122 Z Z 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S S 1127 Undefined 7013 ENTER 7 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 8 Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle for keyboard wedge host interface used to connect the cradle between the keyboard and host computer The digital scanner translates the bar code data into keystrokes and transmits the information to the host computer via the cradle interface The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard This interface adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input In this mode the keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks 5 Indicates Default North American Feature Option 8 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information
78. ISBT codes immediately If only a single ISBT symbol is present the digital scanner must decode the symbol the number of times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 14 29 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol Disable ISBT Concatenation 00h Enable ISBT Concatenation 01h Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation 00h Symbologies 14 29 Check ISBT Table Parameter F1h 42h The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated Enable Check ISBT Table 01h Disable Check ISBT Table 00h ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Parameter DFh If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate use this parameter to set the number of times the digital scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol Scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes to set a value between 2 and 20 Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct
79. J NOTE When the cradle supports the maximum three digital scanners it stores the remote pairing address of each digital scanner in memory regardless of the digital scanner condition e g discharged battery When you want to change the digital scanners paired to the cradle unpair each digital scanner currently connected to the cradle by scanning the Unpairing bar code prior and reconnect each appropriate digital scanner by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Connection Maintenance Interval options are e 15 minutes e 30 minutes e One hour e Two hours e Four hours e Eight hours e 24 hours e Indefinitely Considerations The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval A shorter interval allows new users to gain access to abandoned connections more quickly but causes problems if users leave the work area for extended periods A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time but ties up the system for new users To avoid this conflict users who are going off shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 4 27 to ignore the Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available 4 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide To set the Connection Maintenance Interval scan one of the bar codes below Set Interval to 15 Minutes Set Interval to 30 Minutes Set Interval to 60 Minutes Set Interval to 2 Hours Set Interval to 4 Hours Set Int
80. Product Code A relatively complex numeric symbology Each character consists of two bars and two spaces each of which is any of four widths The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States V Visible Laser Diode VLD A solid state device which produces visible laser light Glossary 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numerics criteria eee 15 1 15 11 default rules 15 5 123Scan2 seeceriisrsca ee ees 12 1 invalid rule ooo ooon LLL 3 3 2D bar codes move cursor past acharacter 15 27 alen een 14 76 move cursor to acharacter 15 27 AZIEC INVEISE 1 eee eee eee eee 14 76 move cursor to start of data 15 27 code 128 emulation nananana naana 14 72 numeric keypad 15 21 15 22 data matrix ebe eege ge 14 73 DEER 15 34 data matrix inverse EENS kes 14 73 EE 15 38 Idee EE 14 74 0 10 7 15 1 microPDF417 11 1 e eee eee eee 14 71 rules Bra eg A EE EE 15 4 M CrOQR 1 eee eee eee eens 14 75 send alt characters 000 15 61 ed nnnnsnssnnrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrnne 14 71 send control characters 15 43 QR code 2 1 esses eee eee 14 74 send function key eu NEE SEN 15 72 QR inverse 12 se eee ee eee 14 75 send keyboard characters 15 48 send keypad characters 15 67 A send preset value 00 15 27 send value 0 0 00005 15 32 AAMVA s
81. Trigger Nothing happens when the trigger is No power to the digital scanner Check the system power If the pulled configuration requires a power supply re connect the power supply Check the battery Ensure that end cap to battery chamber is secured Interface power cables are loose Check for loose cable connections and re connect cables Digital Scanner is disabled For Synapse or IBM 468x mode enable the digital scanner via the host interface The laser aiming or illumination does No power to the digital scanner Check battery and charging contacts not appear when the trigger is ensure that end cap to battery chamber pulled is secured ensure all power and cable connections to cradle are secure Interface power cables are loose Check battery and charging contacts ensure power and cable connections to cradle are secure J NOTE f after performing these checks the symbol still does not scan contact the distributor or contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support See page xix for contact information Technical Specifications Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications 3 7 Table 3 2 Technical Specifications Symbol DS6878 Digital Scanner Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 7 3 in H x 3 85 in L x 2 7 in W 18 5 cm H x 9 7 cm L x 6 9 cm W Weight with battery Approximately 8 4 oz 238 g Color Cash Register White or Twil
82. U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 K 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N n 1095 O _ 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C Cc The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent ASCII Character Sets F 5 Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued EE Code 39 SE ee 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L l 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S S 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X D 1121 Y y 1122 Z Z 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S n The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 2 ALT Key Standard Default Tables ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z ASCII Character Sets F 7 Table F 3 Misc Key Stan
83. a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to gently clean contacts Battery Information Rechargeable battery packs are designed and constructed to the highest standards within the industry However there are limitations to how long a battery can operate or be stored before needing replacement Many factors affect the life of a battery pack such as heat cold customer usage profiles age and severe drops When batteries are stored over a year battery cell manufacturers advise that some irreversible deterioration in overall battery quality may occur To minimize this loss they recommend storing batteries half charged in a dry cool place between 41 F and 77 F 5 C and 25 C the cooler the better and removed from the equipment to prevent the loss of capacity Batteries should be charged to half capacity at least once a year If an electrolyte leakage is observed avoid any contact with the affected area and properly dispose of the battery Replace the battery when a significant loss of run time is detected Batteries must be charged within the 32 F to 104 F 0 C to 40 C temperature range The standard warranty period for all Symbol batteries is 30 days regardless if the battery was purchased separately or included as part of the digital scanner For more information on Symbol batteries please visit http support symbol com support product manuals do Troubleshooting Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Causes Possible
84. a high energy density Laser Diode A gallium arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam This laser type is a compact source of coherent light Laser Scanner A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light LED Indicator A semiconductor diode LED Light Emitting Diode used as an indicator often in digital displays The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor s particular chemical composition Glossary 5 Light Emitting Diode See LED M MIL 1 mil 1 thousandth of an inch MIN Mobile Identification Number The unique account number associated with a cellular device It is broadcast by the cellular device when accessing the cellular system Misread Misdecode A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol MRD Minimum reflective difference A measurement of print contrast N Nominal The exact or ideal intended value for a specified parameter Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value Nominal Size Standard size for a bar code symbol Most UPC EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications e g from 0 80 to 2 00 of nominal ODI See Open Data Link Interface Open Data Link Interface ODI Novell s driver specification for an interface between
85. acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed Disable Enable 9 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable disable code types When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed Disable Enable Chapter 10 Wand Emulation Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a wand emulation host This mode is used whenever wand emulation communication is needed The digital scanner cradle connects either to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point of Sale POS terminal In this mode the digital scanner emulates the signal of a digital wand to make it readable by a wand decoder Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks E _ _ Transmit Unknown Characters Indicates Default Feature Option 10 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Wand Emulation J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the crad
86. adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer e No transmission occurs Clear Transmission Buffer To clear the transmission buffer scan the Clear Buffer bar code below which contains only a start character a dash minus and a stop character e The digital scanner issues a short high low high beep e The digital scanner erases the transmission buffer e No transmission occurs Clear Buffer J NOTE The Clear Buffer contains only the dash minus character In order to scan this command set Code 39 lengths to include length 1 14 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit Buffer There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer 1 Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below which includes only a start character a plus and a stop character 2 The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer e The digital scanner issues a low high beep Transmit Buffer 3 Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space e The digital scanner appends new decode data to buffered data e The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer e The digital scanner signals that it transmitted the buffer with a low high beep e The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer J NOTE The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus character In order to scan this command set Code 39 lengths to include length 1 Overfilling Tra
87. bar code below Enable MSI 01h Disable MSI 00h Set Lengths for MSI The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for MSI to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters scan MSI One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select MSI Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan MSI Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for
88. character by a group of five bars two of which are wide The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded spaces are insignificant Only numeric characters 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded E EAN European Article Number This European International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards Element dimensions are specified metrically EAN is used primarily in retail Element Generic term for a bar or space Encoded Area Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern including start stop characters and data ENQ RS 232 ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host ESD Electro Static Discharge H HID Human Interface Device A Bluetooth host type Host Computer A computer that serves other terminals in a network providing such services as computation database access supervisory programs and network control Glossary 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hz Hertz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second IEC International Electrotechnical Commission This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation IEC 825 Class 1 This is the lowest power IEC laser classification Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an aut
89. character is allowed in this position A Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAA ABC WXY 12F OCR Programming 13 17 Optional Alphanumeric 1 1 When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts an alphanumeric character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99991 1234A 12345 1234 lt Optional Alpha 2 When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts an alpha character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters 2 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAAA2 ABCDE WXYZ ABCD6 Alpha or Digit 3 The data validator requires an alphanumeric character in this position to validate the incoming data 3 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 33333 12ABC WXY34 12AB lt 13 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Any Including Space amp Reject 4 The template accepts any character in this position including space and reject Rejects are represented as an underscore _ in the output This is a good selection for troubleshooting 4 Template Valid data Valid data 99499 12 34 34_98 Any except Space amp Reject 5 5 The template accepts any character in this position except a space or reject Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 55999 A 1
90. check online to enable support for newly released products generate a collection of multi setting bar codes if the number of settings is very large stage large number of scanners simultaneously generate reports with asset tracking information and create custom products Communication with 123Scan2 To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista operating system use a USB cable to connect the scanner cradle to the host computer see d 123Scan Requirements e Host computer with Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista e Scanner e Cradle e USB cable 12 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide For more information on123Scan go to http Awww motorola com 123Scan2 To download 123Scan software and access the Help file integrated in the utility go to http support symbol com support product 123Scan2 html Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner for OCR programming The digital scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR typeface It supports font types OCR A OCR B MICR E13B and US Currency Serial Number OCR is not as secure as a bar code To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading set an accurate OCR template and character subset and use a check digit All OCR fonts are disabled by default Enabling OCR can slow bar code decoding Enabling more than one OCR font could also slow OCR decoding and impact OCR decoding accuracy Throug
91. code data when Enter Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle J NOTE f the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer transmission halts until the digital scanner is re inserted in the cradle In all modes transmissions are halted if the digital scanner is moved out of range The digital scanner resumes when it is back in range If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data parameter bar codes are not stored User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 11 Batch Mode continued Normal Out of Range Batch Mode Standard Batch Mode Cradle Contact Batch Mode Enter Batch Mode Send Batch Data 5 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Low Power Mode Parameter 80h If enabled the digital scanner enters a low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired in which the LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted senses a trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate If disabled power remains on after each decode attempt Disable Low Power Mode 00h
92. data stream The number of stop bits selected 7 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide one or two depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements 1 Stop Bit 2 Stop Bits Data Bits ASCII Format This parameter allows the digital scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7 bit or 8 bit ASCII protocol 7 Bit 8 Bit RS 232 Interface 7 11 Check Receive Errors Select whether or not the parity framing and overrun of received characters are checked The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above Check For Received Errors Enable Do Not Check For Received Errors Disable Hardware Handshaking The data interface consists of an RS 232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines Request to Send RTS and Clear to Send CTS If Standard RTS CTS handshaking is not selected scan data is transmitted as it becomes available If Standard RTS CTS handshaking is selected scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence e The digital scanner reads the CTS line for activity If CTS is asserted the digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to de assert
93. eed WONG Sek dw ews 7 13 Eeer ee Ee 3 3 CNG EE 7 13 f rmat ergeet aod Sdt e aoa ace e A 3 5 MOUT ga cl dead wet warn EE 3 3 miscellaneous scanner options 4 1 RS2232 sew e reas Eer dee eee we eae 3 3 RS 232 transmission 7 11 transmission 3 4 7 15 unknown characters 6 8 7 18 8 6 DND erg ebe 8 oa tae dee thew ata e aes 7 13 exposure options illumination nananana cee ees 5 24 G GS1 DataBal s prae ge AAR dba 14 66 GS1 databar convert GS1 databar to UPC EAN 14 67 H HID Protile ei secede nS ata dean cate a hae ays 4 6 HID Slave 4 4 host types IBM port address 9 4 keyboard wedge 2 0 e eee eee eee 8 4 RO 2202 sak ey pache cad ewa deed od ee a ates 7 6 scanner emulation 11 3 USB NEE 6 4 wand emulation 10 4 l IBM 468X 469X connection 0005 9 2 IBM 468X 469X parameters 05 9 4 IBM defaults ie sicir aeut nenat en es 9 3 illumination 5 24 Index 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide information service xix N inserting baten 1 9 interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes notational conventions xviii check digit verification 14 45 convert to EAN 73 14 46 0 transmit check digit 14 45 OCR K default parameters 13 2 parameters 13 3 keyboard wedge connection 8 2 out of range indicator sssusa aaan nana 4 17 keyboard wedge defaults anaana naaa 8 3 keyboard wedge p
94. eege Eea a NARSA 15 6 Special ComMaANAS ssas a emer ary a e ee eter gee err ee 15 8 Pause EU NON E 15 8 Begin New TE 15 8 VS EE E E EE 15 8 Le oenen a E A E eee ee 15 9 Quit Entering EE 15 9 Disable Rule EE 15 10 REH Geseems E E O Seege 15 11 ee 15 11 Code E 15 15 Message Containing A Specific Data String EE 15 19 Specific String at Start EE 15 19 Table of Contents XV Specific String Any Location stees SEELEN EE 15 20 Any Message OK sse icrsmciirnieneensge enee iaeei r oa PE Eer a aa E EOE EEOSE 15 20 Numeric Keypad geesde E dee Edge e 15 21 Rule Belongs To Set tenner meres ae ene meee eege 15 23 e E 15 24 e ler ereo eee ene ee ene Pe ee eee eee eee eee 15 24 Setup Field 5 WEE 15 27 Move Cursor saanen a a enn nee eee nee 15 28 Send RE 15 28 le E 15 29 leg ol serere a ee ee ee eee ee E 15 30 Send ME xpecacaiecaanecteniges doeccales on ctnseedaien nbnend gant a 15 32 lee e Ae 15 32 Remove E 15 32 EE 15 32 Stop Space Removal oasis sc cess i caciceceesntanen ttecnee des atrlacape este dncecidtakdeeceenesnsosnepacsenes 15 32 Remove Leading Zeros as os teste cerita tenastie edie 15 33 Stop Zero Removal CieedEee goe eerEE eege eege deen Eeer 15 33 EE 15 34 Pad Data VND LUO EE 15 38 SOUS Eege Ee 15 43 Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters eseeeeee 15 43 ege e 15 43 Keybo rd enee 15 48 Send ALT Greg sacs cciiccntsten inca sstnnsediunte R ER 15 61 Send Keypad ET 15 67 Send Function E 15 72 Send R
95. either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 93 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 93 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 14 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 93 continued Code 93 One Discrete Length Code 93 Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 Length Within Range Code 93 Any Length Symbologies 14 39 Code 11 Code 11 To enable or disable Code 11 scan the appropriate bar c
96. enabled the data sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII The host must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII 11 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmission Timeout The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert the Decode signal indicating successful transmission If after a specified amount of time the Decode signal is not asserted indicating that the attached decoder has not successfully received the bar code data the digital scanner issues transmit error beeps Scan a bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout 3 Second Transmission Timeout 4 Second Transmission Timeout 5 Second Transmission Timeout 10 Second Transmission Timeout 30 Second Transmission Timeout Scanner Emulation Interface 11 9 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize When Ignore Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Convert Error on Unknown Characters is selected bar codes containing at least one unknown character are
97. feature Disabling Picklist Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the imaging engine s field of view Disable Continuous Bar Code Read Oh Enable Continuous Bar Code Read 1h Unique Bar Code Reporting Parameter F1h D3h Enable this to report only unique bar codes while the trigger is pressed This option only applies when Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled Disable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness 00h Enable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness 01h 5 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode Session Timeout Parameter 88h This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 5 to 9 9 seconds The default timeout is 9 9 seconds To set a Decode Session Timeout scan the bar code below Next scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers For example to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0 5 seconds scan the bar code below then scan the 0 and 5 bar codes To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Decode Session Timeout User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 21 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Parameter 89h Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Cod
98. license bar code J NOTE This example applies to RS 232 To use this example with a USB interface scan Function Key Mapping on page 6 9 in place of the Send Control M Carriage Return bar codes 1 Embedded Driver s License Parsing 2 Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule 3 First Name 4 Send Space 5 Middle Name Initial 6 Send Space 16 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example continued 7 Last Name Send Enter Key 9 Mailing Address Line 1 10 Send Space 11 Mailing Address Line 2 12 Send Enter Key Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 19 Parsing Rule Example continued 13 Mailing Address City 14 Send Space 15 Mailing Address State 16 Send Space 17 Mailing Address Postal Code 16 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example continued 18 Send Enter Key 19
99. network hardware and higher level protocols It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC Network Interface Controller It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process Open System Authentication Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm P PAN Personal area network Using Bluetooth wireless technology PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly Generally a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33 foot range Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network Parameter A variable that can have different values assigned to it Percent Decode The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode In a well designed bar code scanning system that probability should approach near 100 Glossary 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Print Contrast Signal PCS Measurement of the contrast brightness difference between the bars and spaces of a symbol A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable PCS RL RD RL where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars Programming Mode The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values See Scanning Mode Q Qu
100. of 8 to 25 characters length by the value specified in PDF Prioritization Timeout During that time the digital scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol e g ona US driver s license and if successful reports this only If it does not decode can not find a PDF417 symbol it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout The 1D symbol must be in the device s field of view for the digital scanner to report it This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies Disable PDF Prioritization 00h Enable PDF Prioritization 01h PDF Prioritization Timeout Parameter F1h DOh When PDF Prioritization is enabled this timeout specifies how long the digital scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol before reporting the 1D bar code in the field of view Scan the following bar code then scan four digits from Numeric Bar Codes on page D 2 that specify the timeout in milliseconds For example to enter 400 ms scan the following bar code then scan 0400 The range is 0 to 5000 ms and the default is 200 ms PDF Prioritization Timeout User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 19 Continuous Bar Code Read Parameter F1 89h Enable this to report every bar code while the trigger is pressed J NOTE Motorola strongly recommends enabling Picklist Mode on page 5 16 with this
101. possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost Long low long high beeps Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered Long low long high long low long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Code 39 Buffering High low beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer Three long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full High low high beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased Low high low beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer Low high beeps A successful transmission of buffered data Scanning 2 3 Table 2 1 Standard Beeper Definitions Continued Beeper Sequence Indication Host Specific USB only Four high beeps Digital scanner has not completed initialization Wait several seconds and scan again Digital scanner gives a power up beep after Communication with the bus must be established before the digital scanning a USB Device Type scanner can operate at the highest power level This power up beep occurs more than once The USB bus may put the digital scanner in a state where power to the digital scanner is cycled on and off more than once This is normal and usually happens when the host PC cold boots RS 232 only High beep A lt BEL gt character is received and Beep on lt BEL gt is enabled Point
102. scanned OCR data Literal String and Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data There are two characters used to delimit required literal strings if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal string use the other delimiter Template Valid data Invalid data 35 BC 35 BC AB 22 OCR Programming 13 21 New Line E To create a template of multiple lines add E between the template of each single line E Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 999RAAAA 321 987 XYZW BCAD ZXYW 12 String Extract C This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data The string extract is structured as follows Cc CbPe Where e Cis the string extract operator e bis the string begin delimiter e pP is the category one or more numeric or alpha characters describing the string representation e eis the string end delimiter Values for b and e can be any scannable character They are included in the output stream Template Incoming data Output C gt A gt XQ3 gt ABCDE gt gt ABCDE gt gt ATHRUZ gt 123 gt ATHRUZ gt 1ABCZXYZ No Output 13 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ignore to End of Field D D This operator causes all characters after a template t
103. scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 15 8 12 10 6 Digit add 6 14 5 8 142 1 0 6 30 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 the remainder is 0 Digit Add Right to Left 02h 13 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of these products except for the check digit s product is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit s product Example Scanned data numeric value is 122456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 2 2 4 5 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 Product 6 10 8 12 10
104. scanner and cradle and the PIN codes do not match pairing fails If the PIN codes are not synchronized re synchronize them by disabling security establishing a connection to the cradle and then programming a new PIN code Set PIN Code Variable PIN Code The default PIN code is the user programmed Static PIN Code Typically however HID connections require entering a Variable PIN Code If when attempting connection the application presents a text box that includes a PIN scan the Variable PIN Code bar code then re attempt connection When you hear a beep indicating the digital scanner is waiting for an alphanumeric entry enter the provided variable PIN using the Alphanumeric Bar Codes on page E 1 then scan End of Message on page E 7 if the code is less than 16 characters The digital scanner discards the variable PIN code after connection Static PIN Code Variable PIN Code Radio Communications 4 27 Encryption J NOTE Authentication must be performed before Encryption can take effect To set up the digital scanner for enabling Encryption scan Enable Encryption To prevent the digital scanner from enabling Encryption scan Disable Encryption When enabled the radio encrypts data Enable Encryption Disable Encryption 4 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction If desired program the digital scanner to perform various funct
105. scanner is set up as a Master the Bluetooth address of the remote device to which a connection is requested is required A pairing bar code with the remote device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the remote device See the Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 22 for information about creating a pairing bar code Master When the digital scanner is set up as a Master SPP it initiates the radio connection to a slave device Initiating the connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device see Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 22 Slave When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave device SPP the digital scanner accepts an incoming connection request from a remote device lt J NOTE The number of digital scanners is dependent on the host s capability Radio Communications 4 7 Bluetooth Friendly Name You can set a meaningful name for the digital scanner that appears in the application during device discovery The default name is the digital scanner name followed by its serial number e g DS6878 123456789ABCDEF Scanning Set Defaults reverts the digital scanner to this name use custom defaults to maintain the user programmed name through a Set Defaults operation To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name scan the following bar code then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes lf the name contains less than 23 characters scan End of Message on page E 7 after
106. select Low RTS or High RTS line state Host Low RTS Host High RTS Beep on lt BEL gt Point to Point Mode Only When this parameter is enabled the digital scanner issues a beep when a lt BEL gt character is detected on the RS 232 serial line lt BEL gt is issued to gain a user s attention to an illegal entry or other important event J NOTE This parameter is not supported in Multipoint to Point mode Beep On lt BEL gt Character Enable Do Not Beep On lt BEL gt Character Disable RS 232 Interface 7 17 Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions Minimum 0 msec Low 25 msec Medium 50 msec High 75 msec Maximum 99 msec 7 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Nixdorf Beep LED Options When Nixdorf Mode B is selected this indicates when the digital scanner should beep and turn on its LED after a decode Normal Operation Beep LED immediately after decode Beep LED After Transmission
107. sent to the host and the digital scanner emits an error beep Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Wand Emulation Interface 10 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 By default the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was decoded This can be a problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies for example GS1 DataBar Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar code Any lowercase characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters This also allows ADF rules If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled if any characters that do not have a corresponding character are encountered the digital scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted lt J NOTE ADF Note By default the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF rules Enabling this parameter has the side effect of allowing the scanned data to be processed by the ADF rules see Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting Enable Convert to
108. single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Symbologies 14 53 Set Lengths for MSI continued J NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths MSI One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for MSI applications MSI One Discrete Length MSI Two Discrete Lengths MSI Length Within Range MSI Any Length 14 54 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide MSI Check Digits With MSI symbols one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader The second check digit is optional If the MSI codes include two check digits scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 14 55 for the selection of second digit algorithms One MSI Check Digit 00h Two MSI Check Digits 01h Transmit MSI Check Digit s Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the chec
109. the appropriate bar code below Enable Codabar 01h Disable Codabar 00h Set Lengths for Codabar The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Codabar to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters scan Codabar One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Codabar Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan
110. the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Motorola Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Motorola products MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the US Patent amp Trademark Office Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Microsoft Windows and ActiveSync are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners This media or Motorola Product may include Motorola Software Commercial Third Party Software and Publicly Available Software The Motorola Software that may be included on this media or included in the Motorola Product is Copyright c by Motorola Inc and its use is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motor
111. to code 39 9 5 ignore bar code configuration 9 6 ignore been 9 5 port address 9 4 illumination i405 eet eked ae ek awed be EA 5 24 interleaved 20f5 cee eee eee 14 42 convert to EAN 13 14 46 JONQUNS ieee be eae dew tee wens E 14 43 inverse ID 14 60 ISBT 128 EE 14 27 ISBT concatenation 14 28 14 29 ISBT concatenation redundancy 14 29 ISSN EAN o mariat en cede deed aes 14 24 Japan postal 14 63 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation 8 8 Caps OCK ON eet dene dade ted 8 8 capsl ock override 0 e00 8 9 country keyboard types country codes 8 5 host typeS 8 4 ignore unknown characters 8 6 intra keystroke delay 05 8 7 keystroke dea 8 7 Korean 3g Of 5 ecient are d EE aden wed wets ane 14 59 korean 300 5 was eae cee ee ded eed ae ee 14 59 lock override 4 20 low power mode 5 12 matrix 2 ob 14 56 matrix 2 of 5 check dont 14 58 matrix 2 of 5 lengths 14 57 matrix 2 of 5 redundancy 14 58 MAXICOUG EE 14 74 microPDF417 0 cece eee 14 71 MICKOQOR sic ceed oda wel ee ee ee 14 75 mobile phone display mode 5 17 MSI tege Raeren eee 14 52 MSI check digit algorithm 14 55 MSI check digits 14 54 MSI lengths 14 52 MSI transmit check digit 14 54 multicode concatenation symbology
112. you have a problem with your equipment contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support for your region Contact information is available at http Avwww motorola com enterprisemobility support When contacting Enterprise Mobility Support please have the following information available e Serial number of the unit XX Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide e Model number or product name e Software type and version number Motorola responds to calls by E mail telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If you purchased your Enterprise Mobility business product from a Motorola business partner contact that business partner for support Chapter 1 Getting Started Introduction The Symbol DS6878 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional bar code scanning performance and advanced ergonomics in a light weight design The digital scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended periods of time Figure 1 1 Symbol DS6878 Digital Scanner 1 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Interfaces The CR0078 S cradle supports the following interfaces USB connection to
113. you need this level of security try to improve the quality of the bar codes Security Level 0 00h Security Level 1 01h Security Level 2 02h Security Level 3 03h 14 80 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Intercharacter Gap Size The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small Due to various bar code printing technologies this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed preventing the digital scanner from decoding the symbol If this problem occurs scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out of specification bar codes Normal Intercharacter Gaps 06h Large Intercharacter Gaps OAh Report Version Scan the bar code below to report the version of software installed in the digital scanner Report Software Version Symbologies 14 81 Macro PDF Features Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file The scanner can decode symbols that are encoded with this feature and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data stored in up to 50 MacroPDF symbols CAUTION When printing keep each Macro PDF sequence separate as each sequence h
114. 0000ee eee 10 4 parser version ID 16 16 parsing driver s license dai 16 1 parts rade feb a veg ted a eda bid ad eae WR edd 1 4 1 5 SCANNCH 2 ict dare tate EE 1 3 PDF417 bar codes 0 02000 eae 14 71 PDF prioritization 5 18 PIN code Statie diac i EN 4 26 variable 8 scd aes Perak at eed ase eed 4 26 pinouts cradle signal descriptions 3 10 point to point communication 4 18 postal CodeS sestanki nerka dew Nei 14 61 Australian postal 14 64 Japan postal 14 63 Netherlands KIX code 14 64 transmit UK postal check digit 14 63 transmit US postal check digit 14 62 UK postal ue dene wees ag ioia kea at 14 62 UPU FICS postal 14 65 US planet 2 un ER breve boeken em 14 61 US postnet 14 61 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 14 65 DOE eege Hales ete a eared Ge ES 1 7 va USB atcceanetie eee ad ELERA EA 1 7 Q QR code bar codes n ananena 14 74 quiet zone leading margin 10 5 R radio communication Bluetooth Technology Profile support 1 6 1 14 defaults 4 2 multipoint to point 4 18 PANNO EEN 1 14 parameters 2000 0c eee 4 4 4 5 point to point 4 18 reconnect attempt 4 15 reconnect attempt beep 4 14 range indicator 4 17 reconditioning battery bar code 1 10 reconnect attempt 4 15 reconnect attempt beep 4 14 removing battery 1 9 replacing battery 1 9
115. 086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z 6 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6 4 USB GUI Key Character Set GUI Key Keystroke 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI5 3054 GUI6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUIA 3066 GUIB 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUIE 3070 GUI F 3071 GUIG 3072 GUIH 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUIK 3076 GUIL 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key USB Interface 6 19 Table 6 4 USB GUI Key Character Set Continued GUI Key Keystroke 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUIS 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key Table 6 5 USB F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015
116. 1 composite bar codes composite CC A B 0 00 cee 14 68 composite CC 14 68 composite TLC 39 0 005 14 69 UPC composite mode 14 69 configurations xvii conventions notational 3s eve deus ee eee ee Eee eek ees xviii ei Ce EE 1 6 CONNECING wees heehee eee ae eed eee dios 1 6 diagram 1 4 1 5 inserting SCANNET 00 e eee eee 1 11 interfaces derengeni tarada keea bese ods 1 2 MOUNTING essea k e a heed AT 1 8 PINGUIS Zaang Er wide eda AER Ae ee 3 10 supply power 0 0 ikas AEA ee 1 7 cradle partS 0 000 c eee eee ees 1 4 1 5 D data matrix bar codes 5 14 73 dec ode ZONE a dedia Bae ka at eee aa A 2 7 default parameters All ce tas er aretha aed PA ae ae ae A A 1 IBM EEN 9 3 keyboard wedge 8 3 OGR EE 13 2 radio Communication 4 2 e sarreria raar RO SSC TEEN dea SE 7 3 scanner emulation 0 005 11 3 standard default table F 1 symbologieS 0 0 eee eee eee 14 2 USB aay ee den ee eave eae cree e 6 3 user preferences 5 2 wand emulation 10 3 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes discrete Z OFS mierenia d eat E ach 14 46 driver s license ADF parsing sample 24 16 21 field parsing bar codes 16 4 16 5 16 6 parsing bar codes 0 005 16 2 parsing rule example 16 17 E SHEI AR esos Vad es aeeee arene 4 2 4 27 error indications ack Nak ACEN a eed
117. 23 Z456 A BCD Optional Digit 7 When this option appears in the template string the template accepts a numeric character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters 7 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99977 12345 789 789AB OCR Programming 13 19 Digit or Fill 8 The data validator accepts any numeric or fill character in this position 8 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 88899 12345 gt gt 789 lt lt 789 Alpha or Fill F F The data validator accepts any alpha or fill character in this position Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAAFF ABCXY LMN gt gt ABC lt 5 Required Space When this option appears in the template string the template accepts a space if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Space Template Valid data Invalid data 99 99 12 34 67891 13 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Optional Small Special When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts a special character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Small special characters are and Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AA 99 MN 35 XY98 XYZ12 Other Template Operators These template operators assist in capturing delimiting and formatting
118. 250 000 insertions 3 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3 2 Technical Specifications Symbol DS6878 Digital Scanner Continued Item Ambient Light Immunity Description Incandescent 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Sunlight 8 000 ft candles 86 000 Lux Flourescent 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Mercury Vapor 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Sodium Vapor 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Immune to normal or artificial light Accessories Lanyard Lanyard attaches to the battery door Table 3 3 Technical Specifications CRO078 S SR0008 Cradle Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 2 0 in H x 8 35 in L x 3 4 in W 5 cm H x 21 1 cm L x 8 6 cm W Weight Approximately 6 4 oz 183 gm Voltage amp Current Charging Cradle Voltage 5 10 VDC 5 10 VDC Current 700mA External power 475 mA Host power through cable 12 10 VDC 300 mA External power 12 10 VDC 220 mA Host power through cable Non charging Cradle 5V 70ma or 12 V 50 mA Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black HC Configuration Healthcare White Power Requirements 4 75 14 0 VDC Performance Characteristics Interfaces Supported CR0078 SC only Features on board Multiple Interface with RS 232C Standard Nixdorf ICL amp Fujitsu IBM 468x 469x Keyboard Wedge USB Standard IBM SurePOS Macintosh Laser Wand Emulation 123Scan Remote Digi
119. 4 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter lati Default Pt hes aa Code 11 Check Digit Verification 34h Disable 14 41 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s 2Fh Disable 14 42 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF 06h Disable 14 42 Set Lengths for 2 of 5 16h 17h 14 14 43 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 31h Disable 14 45 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Ch Disable 14 45 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 52h Disable 14 46 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Discrete 2 of 5 05h Disable 14 46 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 14h 15h 12 14 47 Codabar NW 7 Codabar 07h Disable 14 49 Set Lengths for Codabar 18h 19h 5 to 55 14 49 CLSI Editing 36h Disable 14 51 NOTIS Editing 37h Disable 14 51 MSI MSI OBh Disable 14 52 Set Length s for MSI 1Eh 1Fh 4 to 55 14 52 MSI Check Digits 32h One 14 54 Transmit MSI Check Digit 2Eh Disable 14 54 MSI Check Digit Algorithm 33h Mod 10 Mod 10 14 55 Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 FOh 98h Disable 14 55 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Fih 6Ah Disable 14 56 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths Fih 6Bh 1 Length 14 14 57 Eih 6Ch Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy Fih 6Dh Disable 14 58 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Fih 6Eh Disable 14 58 Table 14 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Symbologies 14 5 Parameter lati Default Ph a Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check
120. 5 volt decoder only Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty Scanner Emulation Interface 11 3 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 11 1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page 11 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 11 1 Scanner Emulation Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 11 4 Parameter Pass Through Parameter Process and Pass Through 11 5 Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 11 6 Module Width 20 us 11 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 11 7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 11 7 Transmission Timeout 3 sec 11 8 Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 11 9 Leading Margin 2ms 11 9 Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 11 10 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Scanner Emulation Host Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host Undecoded Scanner Emulation Host 11 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanner Emulation Host Parameters
121. 9 R gq ired Space E 13 19 Optional Small Special E 13 20 Other Template Operators eusg egtd geess EEEEEEE ENEE 13 20 Repeat Previous NEE 13 24 Template E un 13 25 OCR Check Digit Modulus cc tescnicicaatarctacwsqcacewendeaannasednensge ve teciensintcadatuccnnguatndccunmedidas 13 25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier AEN 13 26 OCR Check Digit Validation ee 13 27 leie 13 27 Product Add Left to Right teen 13 27 Product Add Right to EE 13 28 DigitAdd KE ee EE 13 28 Digit Add Right to eegene 13 29 Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder AAA 13 30 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder 111 13 31 Health Industry HIBCC43 siccciccsccccias decke ESA EEGENEN 13 31 Chapter 14 Symbologies Introduchon Me T T 14 1 Scanning Sequence an EE 14 1 Errors While Scanning MEET 14 2 Symbology Parameter Defaults sccitee teats cnrce telecadonca tet chested beet anear due tetysedttss 14 2 El ca tea ieee is ote A AEE A E cet 14 7 Enable Disable WP G A E 14 7 Enable Disable UPC E sa c cesseceetsoreecancannceateceegeanticttand saeanudeacineadenqesandanttcanpancadaneds 14 7 Enable Disable WPC E E 14 8 Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 E 14 8 Eneble Disable E ak TC E Ke EE 14 9 Enable Disable Bookland EAN c ccecceeccecceecececeeeeeeeecucecuceeeneeeneeeneeneeeneeeneneneenes 14 9 xii Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals AAA 14 10 User Programmable Supplementals ex eegekiegetssg ukeegeuusssussgergeehErgE sees EE Setbes deeg 14
122. A field parsing setup 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 EE 16 11 16 12 16 13 EE 16 14 16 15 16 16 ADP UIST icara raa ed betel eee 15 6 Australian postal 14 64 auto reconnect in Bluetooth keyboard emulation HID slave mode 4 17 auto reconnect interval 4 14 AZE nah oe bah odes Dees Ae ea es 14 76 aztec inverse 0000 cece eee 14 76 batch mode 5 10 5 11 battery reconditioning 1 10 beep after good decode 5 5 beep on insertion 0 0 0 eee ee 5 9 beeper tone 5 7 beeper volume 5 8 5 9 bluetooth friendly name 4 7 Bluetooth technology support 4 8 bookland EAN 00 0 0 000es 14 9 bookland ISBN 14 21 DUMEFIAG o eeu kage adn ee NEE Ae 14 34 14 35 CANCE EE D 3 Chinese 20f5 eee 14 55 codabar 14 49 codabar CLSl editing 14 51 codabar lengths 20 08 14 49 codabar NOTIS editing 14 51 ele Ca WEE 14 39 code 11 lengths 0005 14 39 COd6 128 2220 pie thrawde ied twee dete e es 14 25 code 128 emulation 14 72 code 128 lengths 14 25 CODE 39 nace MAR aiae er ER eda eee Nk 14 30 transmit butter 14 36 code 39 check digit verification 14 33 code 39 full ASCI 0 00 14 34 code 39 lengths 2 0 eee 14 32 code 39 transmit check digit 14 33 ele I3 or iuad aea a ata e Se ed 14 37 code 93 l
123. ASCII Code 32 C Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated GS1 128 Coupon Code 128 portion d Data Matrix E UPC EAN Coupon UPC portion e GS1 DataBar Family F Codabar G Code 93 H Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 L PDF417 Macro PDF417 Micro PDF417 L2 TLC 39 M MSI Q QR Code MicroQR S Discrete 2 of 5 IATA 2 of 5 U Maxicode Z Aztec Aztec Rune X Bookland EAN ISSN EAN Trioptic Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 US Postnet US Planet UK Postal Japan Postal Australian Postal Netherlands KIX Code USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal Signature Capture B 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B 3 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Code Type Option Value Option Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing 1 Reader has checked one check character 3 Reader has checked and stripped check character 4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion 5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character 7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character Example A Full ASCII bar code with check character W A Il MI DW is transmitted as JA7AIMID where 7 3 4 Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time Always transm
124. Beep Style The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles e Beep On Successful Transmit The digital scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to the digital scanner so the digital scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time e Beep At Decode Time The digital scanner beeps upon decode This results in a double beep sequence from most decoders since the digital scanner beeps and the decoder beeps at a different frequency when it successfully decodes the output e Do Not Beep Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep Beep On Successful Transmit Beep At Decode Time Do Not Beep Scanner Emulation Interface 11 5 Parameter Pass Through The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder In this way customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning the necessary parameters only once For example to enable D 2 of 5 scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code The digital scanner and the attached decoder both process the parameter Parameter Process and Pass Through Parameter Process Only 11 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Newer Code Types The digital scanner supports a
125. Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection The digital scanner initiates the connection to the remote device and is the Master Scan Serial Port Profile Master then scan the PAIR bar code for the remote device See Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 22 for information about creating a pairing bar code for a remote device Serial Port Profile Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the Slave Scan Serial Port Profile Slave and wait for the incoming connection Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support See page 4 6 for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and Master Slave definitions The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the slave Scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave and wait for the incoming connection NOTE 1 The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile For detailed information and HID host parameters see HID Host Parameters on page 4 8 2 When the di
126. CR Minimum Characters 3 13 12 OCR Maximum Characters 100 13 13 OCR Security Level 80 13 13 OCH Subset Selected font variant 13 14 OCH Quiet Zone 50 13 14 OCR Bright Illumination Disable 13 15 OCR Template 54R 13 16 OCR Check Digit Modulus 1 13 25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier 121212121212 13 26 OCR Check Digit Validation None 13 27 UPC EAN UPC A Enable 14 7 UPC E Enable 14 7 UPC E1 Disable 14 8 EAN 8 JAN 8 Enable 14 8 EAN 13 JAN 13 Enable 14 9 Bookland EAN Disable 14 9 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 and 5 digits Ignore 14 10 User Programmable Supplementals 14 13 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 7 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Et es ell Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 7 14 13 Transmit UPC A Check Digit Enable 14 14 Transmit UPC E Check Digit Enable 14 15 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit Enable 14 15 UPC A Preamble System Character 14 16 UPC E Preamble System Character 14 17 UPC E1 Preamble System Character 14 18 Convert UPC E to A Disable 14 19 Convert UPC E1 to A Disable 14 19 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend Disable 14 20 Bookland ISBN Format ISBN 10 14 21 UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable 14 22 Coupon Report Old Coupon Format 14 23 ISSN EAN Disable 14 24 Code 128 Code 128 Enable 14 25 Set Length s f
127. Case No Case Conversion 6 10 Ignore Beep Disable 6 11 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 6 11 6 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Select the desired USB device type J NOTE When changing USB Device Types the digital scanner automatically restarts The digital scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences HID Keyboard Emulation IBM Table Top USB IBM Hand Held USB USB OPOS Handheld USB Interface 6 5 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device J NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets The digital scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences North American Standard USB Keyboard German Windows French Windows French Canadian Windows 95 98 French Canadian Windows 2000 XP Spanish Windows 6 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB C
128. Chinese E 14 55 Enable Disable Chinese 2ofb nanne eneen 14 55 Matrix 2 Of ET 14 56 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 14 56 Set Lengths for Matrix 2 Of 5 EE 14 57 Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy E 14 58 Matrix 2 0f 5 C eck Digit rsrsrs a E 14 58 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit siacicccesscaccnsdcvanieisacancade tendieasdnesadataccaneantedcnannastdad 14 59 KOrean 3 Of 5 E E E E 14 59 Enable Disable Korean 3 Of 5 c cc cessesseeceseneeeeeaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaeececeeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeneseness 14 59 Inverse De EE 14 60 be keet E 14 61 US POSIMO a ncarensxncssiuiis fen EE ee Eege deeg 14 61 E EE 14 61 Transmit US Postal Check Ee TE 14 62 UK Postal is saiesstsusicdaastin D st a E a EA ERE 14 62 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit E 14 63 Japan Postal see 14 63 Australian e E EE 14 64 Netherlands Kee E 14 64 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail AAA 14 65 UPU FICS Postal gege egen geheieren deg 14 65 GSI EE ee 14 66 ie AAS E eecsacissaadessekeasstaasdaasentecananastsdacswidddandaniaaneeisiadaeidigaatatasnctssudeaaanddiants 14 66 rot Data at Limited EE 14 66 GS1 DataBar Expanded WEE 14 67 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN sscjcccscciscicanpccicncaid SCENE ENEE 14 67 RIS eege 14 68 eelere 14 68 Composite CC A B ergeet eege 14 68 Composite LEE entgeet EES 14 69 UPG Composite EE 14 69 xiv Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Composite Been Mode cisccctesaniccccaseapeteaconccaeenhucnsetaxcadicaniiactaiearteneeniuabcapenduconemaiaattee 14 70 GS1 128 Emulatio
129. Digit F1h 6Fh Disable 14 59 Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 Fih 45h Disable 14 59 Inverse 1D Fih 4Ah Regular 14 60 Postal Codes US Postnet 59h Disable 14 61 US Planet 5Ah Disable 14 61 Transmit US Postal Check Digit 5Fh Enable 14 62 UK Postal 5Bh Disable 14 62 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 60h Enable 14 63 Japan Postal FOh 22h Disable 14 63 Australian Postal FOh 23h Disable 14 64 Netherlands KIX Code FOh 46h Disable 14 64 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail Fih 50h Disable 14 65 UPU FICS Postal F1h 63h Disable 14 65 GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 FOh 52h Disable 14 66 GS1 DataBar Limited FOh 53h Disable 14 66 GS1 DataBar Expanded FOh 54h Disable 14 67 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN FOh 8Dh Disable 14 67 Composite Composite CC C FOh 55h Disable 14 68 Composite CC A B FOh 56h Disable 14 68 Composite TLC 39 FOh 73h Disable 14 69 UPC Composite Mode FOh 58h Never Linked 14 69 Composite Beep Mode FOh 8Eh Beep As Each Code 14 70 Type is Decoded GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes FOh ABh Disable 14 70 2D Symbologies PDF417 OFh Enable 14 71 14 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 14 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter atti Default SE MicroPDF417 E8h Disable 14 71 Code 128 Emulation 7Bh Disable 14 72 Data Matrix FOh 24h Enable 14 73 Data Matrix Inverse Fih 4Ch Regular 14 73 Maxicode FOh 26h Disable 14 74 QR Code FOh 25h Enable 14 74 QR Inve
130. E 12 1 Communication With 123SCan2 o icccececccccceeeecceseeeceeeeeeueeseeseueueeseeaeueeeeuseneeeeeneneeeeeueaes 12 1 please lor 1g Page 219 UE EE 12 1 Chapter 13 OCR Programming att ele er le NEE 13 1 OCR Parameter Defaults 13 2 OCR Programming Men 13 3 Enable Disable OCR A ooic ccccceccccccceccccceecceecseeueeeesuueueesseueuaeeeueaeaseseeeueseeeueaaeveneuauaes 13 3 E El MEIER deer Eege 13 3 Enable Disable OCHB nenna nnnnnnnnrnnnn 13 5 OGR B Variant NEE 13 6 Enable Disable MICR EIB 13 9 Table of Contents xi Enable Disable US Currency Serial Number ssssssessssresssrrneerennrrsrerrsssrrrnserrnnerrnee 13 10 OCR Orientation scsiacesdeccaeckensstecceaeeeciectacdatenceecatnecenteuatiaaveseeeetssearhemeaneuetbeecthexastece 13 10 NT ENV EE EE E A A E E T EEEE 13 12 OCR Minimum EE eenegen een 13 12 OCR Maximum Characters eege onsen sceisenecavetas dale oArectencsecedeswt dest tiies cianenssecexedeentens 13 13 EE 13 13 OGR USS ege ca tts wot eg EE EE 13 14 OCR Q iet EE 13 14 OCR Bright A MEN E 13 15 OCR TSI E 13 16 Required Digit 9 EE 13 16 See E ele A ET 13 16 Optional Alphanumeric 1 cccdcnratctncesgcrscresdconaunednecagaecedecnstnt dadmeecdnagaatedeeemnasties 13 17 Optional Alpha 2 cremer EES 13 17 Alpha or DIgIt S E 13 17 Any Including Space amp Reject 4 EE 13 18 Any except Space amp Reject 5 eebe ege Eege 13 18 Optional Digit 7 geeeeeegeeeeesgeeeeen gegen Dees ege seg 13 18 Digitor EE ee 13 19 PSION EE 13 1
131. EE Ni C 4 PDA EE C 4 RECH Ed EE C 4 EK ee LEE C 5 lee Te EE C 5 LEE C 5 UK POSTI fates ere ree Ee A C 5 Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar e ele TE D 2 TCS EE D 3 Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes dert Keyb ardi eege E 1 Appendix F ASCII Character Sets Glossary Index Tell Us What You Think Introduction The Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up operating maintaining and troubleshooting the Symbol DS6878 digital scanner and cradles Configurations This guide includes the following configurations DS6878 SR20001WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range cash register white DS6878 SR20007WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range twilight black DS6878 HC2000BWR DS6878 digital scanner standard range healthcare white DS6878 DL20001WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range DL parsing cash register white DS6878 DL20007WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range DL parsing twilight black DS6878 HD20007WR DS6878 digital scanner high density twilight black Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows provides a product overview unpacking instructions and cable connection information describes parts of the digital scanner beeper and LED definitions and how to use the digital scanner provides information on how to care for the digital scanner and cradle troubleshooting and technical specifications provides informa
132. F15 6 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6 5 USBF Key Character Set Continued F Keys Keystroke 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 Table 6 6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 j 6043 6044 undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock USB Interface 6 21 Table 6 7 USB Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 PgUp 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Down Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow 6 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an RS 232 host interface The RS 232 interface is used to attach the scanner cradle to point of sale devices host computers or other devices with an available RS 232 port e COM port If the particular host is not listed in set the communication parameters to match the host device Refer to the documentation for the host device I NOTE This digital scanner uses TT
133. JAN 13 Parameter 03h To enable or disable EAN 13 JAN 13 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable EAN 13 JAN 13 01h Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 00h Enable Disable Bookland EAN Parameter 53h To enable or disable Bookland EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Bookland EAN 01h Disable Bookland EAN 00h J NOTE f you enable Bookland EAN select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 14 21 Also select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 14 10 14 9 14 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals Parameter 10h Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions e g UPC A 2 UPC E 2 EAN 13 2 The following options are available e If you select Ignore UPC EAN with Supplementals and the digital scanner is presented with a UPC EAN plus supplemental symbol the digital scanner decodes UPC EAN and ignores the supplemental characters e If you select Decode UPC EAN with Supplemenials the digital scanner only decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters and ignores symbols without supplementals e If you select Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals the digital scanner decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately If the symbol does not have a supplemental the digital scanner must decode the bar c
134. L RS 232 signal levels which interface with most system architectures For system architectures requiring RS 232C signal levels Motorola offers different cables providing the TTL to RS 232C conversion Contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support for more information Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks Indicates Default Baud Rate 38 400 Feature Option 7 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting an RS 232 Interface J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host computer Serial Port Connection to Host Interface Cable Figure 7 1 RS 232 Direct Connection To connect the RS 232 interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the RS 232 interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner cradle see Connecting the Cradle on page 1 6 2 Connect the other end of the RS 232 interface cable to the serial port on the host 3 Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS 232 interface cable Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet 4 S
135. Length Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length
136. N A N A N A N A N A N A 10 N A N A N A N A N A N A Figure 3 1 illustrates the positions of the cradle pins Din A Pin3 Pin2 Pini Figure 3 1 Cradle Pin Assignments The signal descriptions in Table 3 5 apply to the connector from the digital scanner to the digital scanner cradle and are for reference only Table 3 5 Cradle Pin outs Pin Description 1 CRADLE_TXD 2 VCC 3 GND 4 CRADLE _RXD Introduction This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication between digital scanners cradles and hosts The chapter also includes the parameters necessary to configure the digital scanner The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the also see for all host device and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down If not using a Synapse or USB cable with the cradle select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan a default bar code in Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated w
137. OCR programming e Chapter 14 Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features for the digital scanner e Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting ADF describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting to the host This chapter also contains the bar codes for advanced data formatting e Chapter 16 Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL describes how the DS6878 DL digital scanner can parse out information from the standard US driver s licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators AAMVA compliant ID cards e Appendix A Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults e Appendix B Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers ASCII character conversions and keyboard maps e Appendix C Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes e Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values e Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes includes the bar codes representing the alphanumeric keyboard used when setting ADF rules e Appendix F ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document e Italics are used to highlight chapters and sections in this and related documents e Bold text is used to highlight p
138. PF26 Key Send PF27 Key Send PF28 Key Send PF29 Key Send PF30 Key Send Right Control Key The Send Right Control Key action will send a tap press and release of the Right Control Key Send Right Control Key 15 80 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters The Send Graphic User Interface Character actions taps the specified key while holding the System Dependent Graphic User Interface GUI Key The definition of the Graphic User Interface key depends on the attached system Send GUI 0 Send GUI 1 Send GUI 2 Send GUI 3 Send GUI A Send GUI5 Advanced Data Formatting 15 81 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued IL Send GUI 6 IAM Send GUI 7 0000 Send GUI 8 UII Send GUI 9 IAM Send GUIA LL Send GUI B LIL Send GUI C 15 82 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued
139. Productadd 6 10 8 12 10 46 6 O 0 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6 Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder 05h OCR Programming 13 31 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit s product is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit s product Example Scanned data numeric value is 122459 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 2 2 4 5 9 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 10 8 12 10 9 Digit add 6 1 0 8 1 2 1 0 19 9 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9 Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder 06h Health Industry HIBCC43 This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard Health Industry HIBCC43 09h
140. R 04 00 32 64 64 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B J NOTE The host command SSI SNAPI is for use with hands free base only User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 29 0 50 100 0 0 0 Code 128 Code 100 50 50 0 50 PDF417 Code I a l IRANIE 160 100 100 Figure 5 2 Multicode Expression Example 2 5 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Example 3 To decode the set of three bar codes while excluding the center Code 128 bar code as in Figure 5 3 the expression is The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 3C2015R 40 050 50 C 2 F0 24 R 4 700 100 40 C 208R 465 60 100 100 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 03 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 00 32 32 C 02 FO 24 R 04 46 00 64 28 C 02 00 08 R 04 41 3C 64 64 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x03 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x32 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 OxFO 0x24 0x52 0x04 0x46 0x00 0x64 0x28 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x41 Ox3C 0x64 0x64 0x3B J NOTE The host command SSI SNAPI is for use with hands free base onl
141. S 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U 1022 V CTRL V 1023 w CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 F amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 l 1042 IJ 1043 K The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent ASCII Character Sets F 3 Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued ASCII Value Code 39 EE Keystroke 1044 L j 1045 1046 1047 Jo 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 IZ 1059 F 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 K l gt 1063 Sod 1064 SN 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII EE Code 39 Encode Character one 1072 H H 1073 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U
142. Same Symbol cccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseetteeeeeeeseeesees 5 21 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 5 21 Fuzzy 1D POC SS E 5 22 Hand Held Decode Aiming Fanger ere tesege eege eege Eege 5 23 Decoding Illumination sessile ses Scteets datatat nantes ancien enraiantanierems Anahi demstacnensaanecneecenaine 5 24 Multicode Oe 5 24 Multicode Expression EE 5 25 Multicode Expression Syntax EE 5 25 Defining Multicode Expression Notes AAA 5 26 Multicode Mode Concatenation EE 5 31 Multicode Concatenation Symbology cceeseceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneceeeneseaeeeeeenenaees 5 32 Multicode Troubleshooting eupe sgSese iegegegteeun git Zdepsdege Eden d e eege EEgedeEeg 5 33 Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming seceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 33 Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding ssssesesseessserreerrne 5 33 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters EE 5 35 Transmit Code e 5 35 Prefix Tak AE 5 36 Scan Data Transmission Format s czaiciccsiscancececnsansarictianssasecsanticiacnttadneciexnndoandetvedasiees 5 37 PINT S bstitution EE 5 38 Transmit No Read Message xicncccsantssccrerccsaanessvennstenteaatzanasetnncnnnaandesatennancnteveastene 5 39 Chapter 6 USB Interface treie ie SE 6 1 Connecting a USB Interface at z2gtuegeeeeduesgeN biede ccecdaaseetedetavedtianvas lt tensussdoceeeddannas 6 2 USB Parameter STN EE 6 3 USB Host Pare er Ss cassette case xeces dice sorte ase Gen civ e
143. Send PF3 Key A A0 Send PF4 Key 15 76 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key continued Send PF5 Key Send PF7 Key Send PF9 Key Send PF11 Key Send PF6 Key Send PF8 Key Send PF10 Key Advanced Data Formatting 15 77 Send Function Key continued AAT Send PF12 Key VATA Send PF13 Key VAM Send PF14 Key da IAM Send PF15 Key A A0 Send PF16 Key du Wl Send PF17 Key AAA Send PF18 Key 15 78 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key continued Send PF19 Key Send PF20 Key Send PF21 Key Send PF22 Key Send PF23 Key Send PF24 Key Send PF25 Key Advanced Data Formatting 15 79 Send Function Key continued Send
144. Solutions Battery Digital Scanner battery requires Battery may need reconditioning Restore the battery by performing a frequent charging battery reconditioning cycle See Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 10 for more information Digital Scanner displays solid red Battery may require pre charge Wait for the red LED to turn green LED longer than 3 seconds when due to excessive discharge indicating that the scanner has begun placed in cradle normal charging Recommend allowing battery to fully recharge Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Beeper Indications Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Possible Causes Possible Solutions Digital Scanner emits low high low beeps ADF transmit error See Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming Invalid ADF rule is detected See Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer Normal when scanning the Code 39 Buffering Clear Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an empty Code 39 buffer Digital Scanner emits a low high low high beep sequence while it is being programmed Out of ADF parameter storage space Erase all rules and re program with shorter rules Digital Scanner emits long low long high beeps Input error in
145. Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide 72E 131700 01 Revision A April 2010 il Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide 2009 by Motorola Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Motorola This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Motorola grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Motorola No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Motorola The user agrees to maintain Motorola s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include
146. Windows French Canadian Windows 98 Spanish Windows Italian Windows Radio Communications 4 9 HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes continued Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows French Canadian Windows 2000 XP Portuguese Brazilian Windows 4 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data No Delay 0 msec Medium Delay 20 msec HID CAPS Lock Override When enabled the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows ASCII keyboard type and can not be disabled Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable Long Delay 40 msec Override Caps Lock Key Enable Radio Communications 4 11 HID Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters t
147. Zeros To Length 28 Pad Zeros To Length 29 Pad Zeros To Length 30 Stop Pad Zeros Advanced Data Formatting 15 43 Beeps Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule Beep Once Beep Twice Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters Beep Three Times Control Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send Send Control 2 Send Control A Send Control B 15 44 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control C Send Control D Send Control E Send Control F Send Conirol G Send Control H Send Control I Advanced Data Formatting 15 45 Control Characters continued
148. a 1 Two digit supplemental data only 2 Five digit supplemental data only 3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN 13 UPC A or UPC E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol 4 EAN 8 data packet Example A UPC A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as JE00012345678905 Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as X0123456789X ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as X0123456789X Code 11 0 Single check digit 1 Two check digits 3 Check characters validated but not transmitted GS1 DataBar No option specified at this time Always transmit 0 GS1 DataBar 14 Family ae aa DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier Note In GS1 128 emulation mode GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules i e C1 Example A GS1 DataBar 14 bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted as Je00110012345678902 B 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type EAN UCC Composites GS1 DataBar GS1 128 2D portion of UPC composite Option Value Option Native mode transmission Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules 0 Standard data packet 1 Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separat
149. a Formatting 15 65 Send ALT Characters continued A ug Send Alt U du Wd Send Alt V VAAN Send Alt W NW Send Alt X VAAN Send Alt Y VATA Send Alt Z VAN Send Alt 15 66 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send ALT Characters continued Send Alt Send Alt Advanced Data Formatting 15 67 Send Keypad Characters VATA Send Keypad VAN Send Keypad VATA Send Keypad A HM Send Keypad UA MAI Send Keypad A Mul Send Keypad 0 du Wald Send Keypad 1 15 68 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters continued Send Keypad 2 Send Keypad 3 Send Keypad 4 Send Keypad 5 Send Keypad 6 Send Keypad 7 Send Keypad 8 Advanced Data Formatting 15 69 Send Keypad Characters continued Send Keypad 9 Send Keypad Enter
150. a host The cradle auto detects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus This interface supports the following international keyboards for Windows environment North America German French French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Portuguese Brazilian and Japanese Standard RS 232 connection to a host Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the cradle with the host Keyboard Wedge connection to a host The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes This interface supports the following international keyboards for Windows environment North America German French French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Portuguese Brazilian and Japanese Connection to IBM 468X 469X hosts Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the cradle with the IBM terminal Wand Emulation connection to a host The cradle is connected to a portable data terminal a controller or host which collects the data as wand data and decodes it Scanner Emulation connection to a host The cradle is connected to a portable data terminal a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse adapter cable The cradle auto detects the host Configuration via 123Scan Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle
151. about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds Male DIN Connector Keyboard Connector Female DIN Keyboard Y cable Connector Figure 8 1 Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y cable To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y cable 1 Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector 2 Attach the modular connector of the Y cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle See Connecting the Cradle on page 1 6 Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y cable to the keyboard port on the host device Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y cable to the keyboard connector If needed attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y cable Ensure that all connections are secure Turn on the host system oe NOP TF P Sg Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters on page 8 4 9 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 3 J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 8 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those i
152. adle on page 1 6 2 Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host typically Port 9 3 Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 9 4 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 9 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host The only required configuration is the port number Other digital scanner parameters are typically controlled by the IBM system IBM Interface IBM Parameter Defaults Table 9 1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 9 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 9 1 BM Host Default Table Page Number Parameter Default IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address None Selected 9 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 9 5 Ignore Beep Disable 9 5 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 9 6 9 3 9 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Refer
153. al 30 sec Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode On Bar Code Data Modes of Operation Point to Point Multipoint to Point Point to Point Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only Enable A 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Ar lel Pairing Modes Unlocked 4 20 Pairing on Contacts Enable 4 21 Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min 4 24 Authentication Disable 4 25 Variable Pin Code Static 4 26 Encryption Disable 4 27 User Preferences Set Default Parameter Set Defaults 5 4 Parameter Bar Code Scanning Enable 5 5 Beep After Good Decode Enable 5 5 Suppress Power Up Beeps Do Not Suppress 5 6 Beeper Tone Medium 5 7 Beeper Volume High 5 8 Beeper Duration Medium 5 9 Beep on Insertion Enabled 5 9 Batch Mode Normal Do Not Batch Data 5 10 Low Power Mode Enabled 5 12 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode 1 Sec 5 13 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim 15 Sec 5 14 Hand Held Trigger Mode Level 5 15 Picklist Mode Disabled Always 5 16 Mobile Phone Display Mode Disable 5 17 PDF Prioritization Disable 5 18 Continuous Bar Code Read Disable 5 19 Decode Session Timeout 9 9 Sec 5 20 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 0 5 Sec 5 21 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 0 2 Sec 5 21 Fuzzy 1D Processing Enable 5 22 1User selectio
154. al scanner to produce formatted data Use the formatted data for age verification credit card application information and more e Server based parsing algorithms the digital scanner recognizes the same ID cards but encrypts the content and sends this to a host side application The host side application uses Motorola s server based parsing algorithms provided as a DLL to produce formatted data This chapter describes how to program the Symbol DS6878 DL digital scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D bar codes on US driver s licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards 16 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parsing There are three options available for programming the digital scanner No driver s license parsing default disables the feature Embedded driver s license parsing this does not require Motorola software DLL Scan the bar codes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the digital scanner outputs See Parsing Divers License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing on page 16 3 for more information As jurisdictional updates become available Motorola updates a series of bar codes on the Motorola Web site http www motorola com enterprisemobility support These bar codes contain embedded software Scanning these in conjunction with the bar codes on page 16 4 download jurisdictional software updates to the digital scanner The updates resi
155. al algorithms and checking for that particular document type Variant OCR Lines Setting Passport 2 TD1 ID Cards 3 TD2 ID Cards 2 Visa Type A 2 Visa Type B 2 Selecting one of the ISBN Book Numbers automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum so you do not need to set this For the best performance in passport reading fix the target passport and the imaging engine in place 6 5 7 5 J NOTE Enable OCR B before setting this parameter If disabling OCR B set the variant to its default OCR B Full ASCII OCR Programming 13 7 OCR B Variant continued OCR B Full ASCII 00h OCR B Banking 01h OCR B Limited 02h OCR B Travel Document Version 1 TD1 3 Line ID Cards 03h OCR B Passport 04h 13 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR B Variant continued OCR B ISBN 10 Digit Book Numbers 06h OCR B Travel Document Version 2 TD2 2 Line ID Cards 08h OCR B Visa Type B OAh OCR B ISBN 10 or 13 Digit Book Numbers 07h
156. al scanner can expect to find in an image Each element represents one bar code in the digital scanner s field of view The order of elements in the expression is the order in which bar code data from each element transmits to the host Elements are defined using one or more of the following methods e By Region This type of element limits decoding to a specific area within the digital scanner s field of view Region coordinates are defined as the top left and bottom right corners of the region expressed in percentages of the field of view These can range from 0 to 100 or 0x00 to 0x64 in hex for both horizontal and vertical axes A region element is constructed as R 4 Top Left Bottom Right Where e R is the character R e 4 is 0x04 indicating there are four bytes thereafter to describe the region e Top Left are two values representing the top left corner of the region e Bottom Right are two values representing the bottom right corner of the region e By Code Type An element can specify a specific bar code symbology to find and decode somewhere in the field of view A code type element is constructed as C 2 Code Type 5 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Where e C is the character C e 2 is 0x02 indicating there are two bytes thereafter to describe the code type e Code Type is the desired symbology s parameter number see Chapter 14 Symbologies For single byte parameter numbers extend t
157. all leading and trailing spaces Crunch All Spaces Scan the bar code below to disable space removal Stop Space Removal Stop Space Removal Advanced Data Formatting 15 33 Remove Leading Zeros Scan the bar code below to remove all leading zeros Remove Leading Zeros Scan the bar code below to disable the removal of zeros Stop Zero Removal Stop Zero Removal 15 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces To pad data to the left scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces Use Send commands to activate this parameter Pad Spaces To Length 1 Pad Spaces To Length 2 Pad Spaces To Length 3 Pad Spaces To Length 4 Pad Spaces To Length 5 Pad Spaces To Length 6 Pad Spaces To Length 7 Advanced Data Formatting 15 35 Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 8 Pad Spaces To Length 9
158. ameter Broadcast Pairing Pairing is the process by which a digital scanner initiates communication with a cradle Scanning Multipoint to Point activates multi digital scanner to cradle operation and allows up to three digital scanners to pair to one cradle The cradle includes a pairing bar code To pair the digital scanner with the cradle scan the pairing bar code on the cradle A high low high low beep sequence indicates that the pairing bar code was decoded When a connection between the cradle and digital scanner is established a low high beep sounds J NOTE 1 The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle 2 Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes 3 When the digital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 4 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pairing Modes When operating with the cradle two modes of pairing are supported e Locked Pairing Mode When a cradle is paired connected to the digital scanner or to three digital scanners in Multipoint to Point mode any attempt to connect a different digital scanner by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature ena
159. an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 The default is 10 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 14 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Enable Disable Code 39 Parameter 00h To enable or disable Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 01h Disable Code 39 00h Enable Disable Trioptic Code 39 Parameter ODh Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Trioptic Code 39 01h Disable Trioptic Code 39 00h J NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously Symbologies 14 31 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Parameter 56h Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32 J NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 01h Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 00h Code 32 Prefix Parameter E7h Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character A
160. ange Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 14 40 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 11 continued Code 11 One Discrete Length Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 Length Within Range Code 11 Any Length Symbologies 14 41 Code 11 Check Digit Verification This feature allows the digital scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code The options are to check for one check digit check for two check digits or disable the feature To enable this feature scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols Disable 00h One Check Digit 01h Two Check Digits 02h 14 42 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit Code 11 Check Digits This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code
161. ansmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code CO for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 00h System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 02h 14 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC E1 Preamble Parameter 24h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E1 preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code CO for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 00h System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 02h Symbologies 14 19 Convert UPC E to UPC A Parameter 25h Enable this to convert UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preambl
162. ar code between the start and stop characters not including those characters Cold Boot A cold boot restarts a computer and closes all running programs COM Port Communication port ports are identified by number e g COM1 COM2 Glossary 3 Continuous Code A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code The absence of gaps allows for greater information density Cradle A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer and provides a storage place for the terminal when not in use D Dead Zone An area within a scanner s field of view in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode Decode To recognize a bar code symbology e g UPC EAN and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned Decode Algorithm A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol Decryption Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data Also see Encryption and Key Depth of Field The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width Discrete Code A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters intercharacter gaps are not part of the code Discrete 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing each
163. aracter 15 24 Send All Data That Remains 15 24 Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 20 Characters 15 24 Move Cursor 15 28 Advanced Data Formatting 15 7 Table 15 1 ADF Bar Codes Continued Parameter et ble Send Pause 15 28 Skip Ahead 15 29 Skip Back 15 30 Send Preset Value 15 32 Remove All Spaces 15 32 Crunch All Spaces 15 32 Stop Space Removal 15 32 Remove Leading Zeros 15 33 Stop Zero Removal 15 33 Pad Data with Spaces 15 34 Pad Data with Zeros 15 38 Beeps 15 43 Control Characters 15 43 Keyboard Characters 15 48 Send ALT Characters 15 61 Send Keypad Characters 15 67 Send Function Key 15 72 Send F1 Key Send F24 Key 15 72 Send PF1 Key Send PF30 Key 15 75 Send Right Control Key 15 79 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters 15 80 Send GUI 0 Send GUI 9 15 80 Send GUI A Send GUI Z 15 81 Turn On Off Rule Sets 15 85 Alphanumeric Keyboard 15 87 Space 15 87 0 9 15 91 A Z 15 92 Cancel 15 96 15 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 15 1 ADF Bar Codes Continued Parameter et le End of Message 15 96 a Z 15 96 15 100 Special Commands Pause Duration Use this parameter along with Send Pause on page 15 28 to insert a pause in the data transmission Set the pause by scanning a two digit number e two bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes in 0 1 second intervals For e
164. aracters within the digital scanner s capability 14 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 128 continued Code 128 One Discrete Length Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths Code 128 Length Within Range Code 128 Any Length Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 Parameter OEh To enable or disable GS1 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable GS1 128 01h Disable GS1 128 00h Symbologies 14 27 Enable Disable ISBT 128 Parameter 54h ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry Scan a bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128 If necessary the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data Enable ISBT 128 01h Disable ISBT 128 00h 14 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide ISBT Concatenation Parameter F1h 41h Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types If you select Disable ISBT Concatenation the digital scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters If you select Enable ISBT Concatenation there must be two ISBT codes in order for the digital scanner to decode and perform concatenation The digital scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols If you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation the digital scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of
165. arameter names and options About This Guide xix e bullets indicate e Action items e Lists of alternatives e Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential e Sequential lists e g those that describe step by step procedures appear as numbered lists e Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks are used to denote default parameter settings _ Baud Rate 9600 Indicates Default Feature Option J NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the reader Failure to read the note will not result in physical harm to the reader equipment or data CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility of data or material damage may AN occur WARNING This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal A injury may occur Related Documents e The Symbol DS6878 Quick Start Guide p n 72 131700 xx provides general information to help the user get started with the digital scanner It includes basic operation instructions and start up bar codes e The CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 135874 xx provides information to help the user set up and use the charge only and host interface cradles It includes set up and mounting instructions The latest version of this guide and all guides are available at http www motorola com enterprisemobility manuals Service Information If
166. arameters 4 8 4 P Korean 3 of 5 bar codeS 14 59 pairing L e ele EE 4 14 barGOd u rg been Ss 1 4 2 2 4 3 LED bar code Tomat 4 22 battery reconditioning definitions 1 11 charging cradle e es sere 1 6 CHANGING una Weds NEEN oe eee tnana 1 11 2 3 connection maintenance interval 4 23 discharging 1 11 Cradle ue EE 4 4 SCANNING 2 eee eee eee eee eee 2 3 lock Override 4 20 standard definitions 00 ee00 2 3 lost connection to host e 1 7 lock override 4 20 Master 66 eee eee eee eee eee 3 4 locked pairing mode 4 20 4 23 master slave setup e 4 6 low power mode cous EEE EELER AEN bende 4 14 methoden 4 21 lee 4 2 4 19 mulitpoint to point 4 18 M on contacts ccc eee ees 4 2 macro PDF 0ccceceeeceuveeuveaees 14 81 Pin codes 6 seen 4 26 flush buffer abort PDF entry 14 81 point to point 26 eee eee ee eee eee 4 18 maintenance 3 1 radio communication 1 14 baten 3 2 SPP eR EE EE 4 4 radies fice cid aed E ee A 3 2 troubleshooting 3 4 3 5 digital scanner d s Sen ante ows E 3 1 ROI E 4 21 master ccccccee 3 4 4 4 4 6 4 14 4 19 pairing beeper definitions e 4 3 matrix 2 of 5 bar codes 00 ees eees 14 56 parameter defaults check digit EENEG 14 58 UE A 1 lengths 14 57 TBM eet acetonide whale aad ead a 9 3 redundancy 14 58 keyboard wedge
167. as unique identifiers A Do not mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences even if they encode the same data When scanning Macro PDF sequences scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption If when scanning a mixed sequence the digital scanner emits two long low beeps Low Low this indicates an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error Flush Macro Buffer This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point transmits it to the host device and aborts from Macro PDF mode Flush Macro PDF Buffer Abort Macro PDF Entry This clears all currently stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF mode Abort Macro PDF Entry 14 82 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Introduction Advanced Data Formatting ADF is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device Scan data can be edited to suit particular requirements To implement ADF scan a related series of bar codes which begin on which allows programming the digital scanner with Advanced Data Formatting ADF Rules Avoid using ADF formatting with bar codes containing more than 60 characters To add a prefix or suffix value for such bar codes use Using ADF with longer bar codes transmits the bar code in segments of length 252 or less depending on the host selecte
168. ation HID Slave Mode Modes of Operation Point to Point 4 18 Point to Point Multipoint to Point Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only Enable 4 19 Pairing Modes Unlocked 4 20 Pairing on Contacts Enable 4 21 Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min 4 23 Authentication Disable 4 25 Variable Pin Code Static 4 26 Encryption Disable 4 27 Radio Communications 4 3 Wireless Beeper Definitions When the digital scanner scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or unsuccessful operations Table 4 2 defines beep sequences that occur during pairing operations For additional beeper definitions see Beeper Definitions on page 2 1 Table 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Indication Four long low beeps 1 A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting 2 When communicating with a cradle the cradle acknowledges receipt of data If the acknowledgment is not received this transmission error beep sequence sounds Data may still have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Five high beeps Emitted every 5 seconds while a reconnection attempt is in progress See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 High low high low beeps Pairing bar code scanned Low high beeps Bluetoo
169. aximum number of bar codes are stored When a bar code is saved successfully a good decode beep sounds and the LED flashes green If the digital scanner is unable to store a new bar code a low high low high out of memory beep sounds See pages 2 1 2 3 and 4 3 for all beeper and LED definitions In all modes calculate the amount of data number of bar codes the digital scanner can store as follows Number of storable bar codes 30 720 bytes of memory number of characters in the bar code 3 J NOTE f the batch mode selection is changed while there is batched data the new batch mode will take effect only after all the previously batched data is sent Modes of Operation e Normal default Do not batch data The digital scanner attempts to transmit every scanned bar code e Out of Range Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to a remote device for example when a user holding the digital scanner walks out of range Data transmission is triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device for example when a user holding the digital scanner walks back into range e Standard Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data after Enter Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data D NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to the remote device is lost e Cradle Contact Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar
170. bled page 4 21 is rejected The currently connected digital scanner s maintain connection In this mode you must set a Connection Maintenance Interval on page 4 23 e Unlocked Pairing Mode Pair connect a new digital scanner to a cradle at any time by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled This unpairs the previous digital scanner from the cradle Point to Point mode only J NOTE In Multipoint to Point mode pairing a fourth digital scanner while in Unlocked Pairing Mode replaces any disconnected out of range digital scanner However if three digital scanners are actively connected to the cradle a fourth digital scanner cannot connect unless you first disconnect one of the original digital scanners by scanning the Unpair bar code To set the cradle pairing mode scan the appropriate bar code below Unlocked Pairing Mode Locked Pairing Mode Lock Override Lock Override overrides a locked digital scanner base pairing and connects a new digital scanner In Multipoint to Point mode this unpairs any disconnected out of range digital scanner first in order to connect the new digital scanner To use Lock Override scan the bar code below followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle LockOverride Radio Communications 4 21 Pairing Methods There are two pairing methods The default method allows the digital scanner and cradle to pa
171. bologies 14 23 Coupon Report Parameter F1h DAh Select an option to determine which type of coupon format to support e Select Old Coupon Format to support UPC A GS1 128 and EAN 13 GS1 128 e Select New Coupon Format as an interim format to support UPC A GS1 DataBar and EAN 13 GS1 DataBar e If you select Autodiscriminate Format the digital scanner supports both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format old Coupon Format 00h New Coupon Format 01h Autodiscriminate Coupon Format 02h 14 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide ISSN EAN Parameter F1h 69h To enable or disable ISSN EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable ISSN EAN 01h Disable ISSN EAN 00h Symbologies 14 25 Code 128 Enable Disable Code 128 Parameter 08h To enable or disable Code 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 128 01h Disable Code 128 00h Set Lengths for Code 128 Parameter L1 D1h L2 D2h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 128 to any length one or two discrete lengths o
172. canner and the host computer is accomplished through the cradle Each bar code contains programming instructions or other data unique to the bar code pattern The digital scanner is paired to the cradle and transmits bar code data to the cradle via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support The cradle then sends that information via an interface cable to the host computer for interpretation e Charge only cradle This cradle serves as a stand and battery charger It does not contain a radio and has no communication capability z NOTE For more information about communication between the digital scanner cradle and host see Chapter 4 Radio Communications Connecting the Cradle Important Connect the interface cable and power supply if necessary in the following order to ensure proper operation of the digital scanner and cradle 1 If a power supply is connected to the cradle disconnect it See Figure 1 5 2 f using an interface cable insert the cable into the cradle s host port 3 If using a power supply that connects to the interface cable insert this power supply into the power connector on the interface cable and the other end to an AC supply A Insert the other end of the interface cable into the appropriate port on the host computer see the specific host chapter for information on host connections 5 If using an external power supply if required by the interface or to allow fast charging of the digital scanner insert the pow
173. ce Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DI K DAN L DIN M MMH N ANANN 0 DI P Q Advanced Data Formatting 15 95 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Du R MT S DIN T RIT U DI V DIN W Xx 15 96 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued VM Y UT Z AN Cancel HNA End of Message IA a UN b c Advanced Data Formatting 15 97 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued AUN d DI e MMM f KAAN g DA h i j 15 98 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued k l m n o p q Advanced Data Formatting 15 99 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DIN r DIN sS MAA t DIN u MAAN v DIN W x 15 100Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued y z Chapter 16 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL Introduction The DS6878 DL digital scanner is capable of parsing out information from standard US driver s licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators AAMVA compliant ID cards Parsing can be achieved in one of two ways e Internally embedded algorithms scanning bar codes activates algorithms internally embedded in the digit
174. ceseaneeeeneeeeauetesateteanerseaaees 1 11 vi Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Vertical Cradle MOUNU eeben Ee EE eer 1 12 Wall Mount Bracket Template secsccssiverceriexernvrcacsucgucezecaseesnnencntexecsrseddbteetanvanteonlnxentues 1 12 Radio Communications EE 1 14 Configuring the e EE e E 1 14 Lee 1 15 Lanyard EE 1 15 Chapter 2 Scanning eigtl RE 2 1 Beeper Definitions ege 2 1 LED Definitions eene ee Eege 2 3 ll E 2 5 it e EE 2 5 COGS Ranges iseten e a a ai ected cee ede 2 7 Chapter 3 Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications treie ie e E 3 1 Maime MAN eege Sa vane ee Eege 3 1 EIGEN Ku 3 1 SF EE 3 2 EE Ale Le EE 3 2 Troubleshooting EE 3 2 Technical Specifications EE 3 7 Cradle Signal Descriptions sgeeegiresengsteeegga geeiert 3 10 Chapter 4 Radio Communications INTodUCHO EE 4 1 Scanning Sequence Examples AAA 4 1 Errors While Scanning EE 4 1 Radio Communications Parameter Defaults cccecceceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeea 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions egpeesaegegeegegEu eene BEE EE Maecenas 4 3 Radio Communications Host Types sscaccccaracsicnccsancaisnicsaatantdaansaaticcensesidanetsanesuanetecnenide 4 4 Bluetooth Technology Profile Support AAA 4 6 E A o css casassaceetes ecsens es decezansctnctanedthtantesterceateieaianaseeniannnckeccbeeniheis 4 6 TEE eege Eege 4 6 Slave eet 4 6 Bluetooth BEE Eu 4 7 DISCOVG E E 4 7 HID e 4 8 HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes
175. ck Digit 01h Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit 00h UK Postal To enable or disable UK Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UK Postal 01h Disable UK Postal 00h Symbologies 14 63 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 00h Japan Postal To enable or disable Japan Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Japan Posial 01h Disable Japan Posial 00h 14 64 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Australian Postal To enable or disable Australian Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Australian Postal 01h Disable Australian Postal 00h Netherlands KIX Code To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Netherlands KIX Code 01h
176. ck key 15 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide and the cashier keys the price manually To implement this first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation such as Scan Rule Belongs to Set 1 When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key send the data that remains send the Enter key The sale rule may look like this Scan Rule Belongs to Set 2 When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key To switch between the two sets of rules program a switching rule that specifies what type of bar code to scan to switch between the rule sets For example in the case of the sale rule above the rule programmer wants the cashier to scan the bar code M before a sale To do this a rule can be entered as follows When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with M select rule set number 1 Program another rule to switch back When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with N turn off rule set number 1 Or include the switching back to normal rules in the sale rule When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key turn off rule set 1 For optimal results scan the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 15 10 after programmin
177. correct bar code or Cancel bar code was scanned Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device try to re connect check remote device configuration Digital Scanner emits long low long high long low long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space Scan Default Parameters on page 5 4 Out of memory for ADF rules Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Free up remote device resources Digital Scanner emits high high high low beeps RS 232 receive error Normal during host reset Otherwise set the digital scanner s RS 232 parity to match the host setting 3 3 Table 3 1 Problem Digital Scanner emits high low beeps Troubleshooting Continued Possible Causes The digital scanner is buffering Code 39 data Or Keyboard parameter selected 3 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Possible Solutions Normal Or Enter value using bar code keypad Bluetooth disconnection event Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device In Master SPP mode re pair the digital scanner and cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle check cradle power In Slave SPP HID mode reestablish connection between th
178. d and applies the rule to each segment Rules Criteria Linked to Actions ADF uses rules to customize data These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria One rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions For instance a data formatting rule could be Criteria When scan data is Code 39 length 12 and data at the start position is the string 129 Actions pad all sends with zeros to length 8 send all data up to X send a space Scanning a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 transmits the following 00001299 lt space gt If you scan a Code 39 bar code of 1299X15598 this rule is ignored because the bar code did not meet the length criteria The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs 15 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Using ADF Bar Codes When programming a rule make sure the rule is logically correct Plan ahead before scanning To program each data formatting rule e Start the Rule Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 15 8 e Specify Criteria Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria Criteria can include code type e g Code 128 code length or data that contains a specific character string e g the digits 129 See Criteria on page 15 11 e Select Actions Scan all actions related to or affecting these criteria The actions of a rule specify how to format the data for
179. d characters to send Send Space Send Send Send 16 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued du Wil Send AA Send VANTIN Send amp ID Send VARTA Send AAT Send VARTA Send Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 31 Keyboard Characters continued IAU Send VATA Send VAN Send ET Send VAM Send du Send 0 UAT Send 1 16 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send 2 Send 4 Send 6 Send 8 Send 3 Send 5 Send 7 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 33 Keyboard Characters continued AAT Send 9 VATA Send VAN Send d Al Send lt VAM Send VARTA Send gt An AN Send 3 16 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send B Send D Send F Send A Send C Send E Driver s License Set Up
180. d two digits 33A 99 Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter a period and two digits 999992991 Five digits followed by an optional alpha two digits and an optional alphanumeric PN98 Literal field PN98 OCR Check Digit Modulus Parameter Eih BOh This option sets OCR module check digit calculation The check digit is the last digit in the rightmost position in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the collected data The check digit is the end product of a calculation made on the incoming data For check digit calculation for example Modulus 10 alpha and numeric characters are assigned numeric weights see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13 26 The calculation is applied to the character weights and the resulting check digit is added to the end of the data If the incoming data does not match the check digit the data is considered corrupt The selected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation To choose the Check Digit Modulus such as 10 for modulo 10 scan the following bar code then scan a three digit number from 001 to 099 representing the check digit using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting The default is 1 OCR Check Digit 13 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Check Digit Multiplier Parameter F1h BCh This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for the character positio
181. d wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds To perform Scanner Emulation connect the cradle to a mobile computer or a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host Host Port Connector Figure 11 1 Scanner Emulation Connection To connect the Scanner Emulation interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cables to the Cradle on page 1 6 2 Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the digital scanner port on the mobile computer or controller 3 Scan the Scanner Emulation host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 11 3 to enable the Scanner Emulation host interface 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter sf NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 11 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host CAUTION Connect the cradle to a
182. dard Default Table Misc Key Keystroke 3001 PA 1 3002 PA 2 3003 CMD 1 3004 CMD 2 3005 CMD 3 3006 CMD 4 3007 CMD 5 3008 CMD 6 3009 CMD 7 3010 CMD 8 3011 CMD 9 3012 CMD 10 3013 CMD 11 3014 CMD 12 3015 CMD 13 3016 CMD 14 Table F 4 GUI Shift Keys Other Value Keystroke 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI 5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key F 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 4 GUI Shift Keys Continued Other Value Keystroke 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUIA 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUIE 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key ASCII Character Sets F 9 Table F 5 PF Key Standard Default Table PF Keys Keystroke
183. data transmitted per second Set the digital scanner s baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device Otherwise data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form Baud Rate 600 Baud Rate 2400 Baud Rate 9600 Baud Rate 38 400 Baud Rate 1200 Baud Rate 4800 Baud Rate 19 200 RS 232 Interface 7 9 Parity A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character Select the parity type according to host device requirements e Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1 based on data to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character e Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1 based on data to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character e Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1 e Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0 e Select None when no parity bit is required Odd Even Mark Space None Stop Bit Select The stop bit s at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial
184. de A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol Space The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars Specular Reflection The mirror like direct reflection of light from a surface which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code Glossary 7 SPP Serial Port Profile Start Stop Character A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code Substrate A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed Symbol A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology usually including start stop characters quiet zones data characters and check characters Symbol Aspect Ratio The ratio of symbol height to symbol width Symbol Height The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row Symbol Length Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone margin adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone margin adjacent to a stop character Symbology The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type e g UPC EAN Code 39 PDF417 etc T Tolerance Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width U UPC Universal
185. de 80h Enabled 5 12 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode 92h 100 MSec 5 13 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim Fih D9h 15 Sec 5 14 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 3 Parameter dree Default hal Lae Hand Held Trigger Mode 8Ah Level 5 15 Picklist Mode FOh 92h Disabled Always 5 16 Mobile Phone Display Mode Fih CCh Disable 5 17 PDF Prioritization Fih CFh Disable 5 18 Continuous Bar Code Read F1 89h Disable 5 19 Unique Bar Code Reporting Fih D3h Disable 5 19 Decode Session Timeout 88h 9 9 Sec 5 20 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 89h 0 5 Sec 5 21 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 90h 0 2 Sec 5 21 Fuzzy 1D Processing F1h 02h Enable 5 22 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern FOh 32h Enable 5 23 Decoding Illumination FOh 2Ah Enable 5 24 Multicode Mode Fih A5h Disable 5 24 Multicode Expression Fih 95h 1 5 25 Multicode Mode Concatenation Fih CDh Disable 5 31 Multicode Concatenation Symbology Fih D2h Concatenate as PDF417 5 32 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character 2Dh None 5 35 Prefix Value 63h 69h 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 36 Suffix 1 Value 62h 68h 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 36 Suffix 2 Value 64h 6Ah Scan Data Transmission Format EBh Data as is 5 37 FN1 Substitution Values 67h 6Dh Set 5 38 Transmit No Read Message 5Eh Disable 5 39 5 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide User Pre
186. de Lengths Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code type must contain Select one length per rule only Do not select any code length to select code types of any length 1 Character 2 Characters 3 Characters 4 Characters 5 Characters 6 Characters 15 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths continued VAAN 7 Characters III 8 Characters A 9 Characters ANM 10 Characters d n Wi 11 Characters VAM 12 Characters dn Wil 13 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 17 Code Lengths continued VAN 14 Characters db Wl 15 Characters UMM 16 Characters VANTIN 17 Characters AUT 18 Characters VAAN 19 Characters AUT 20 Characters 15 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths continued
187. de in the digital scanner s Flash memory and apply when the digital scanner is next used Server based driver s license parsing this requires Motorola software DLL The digital scanner recognizes the same ID cards encrypts the content and sends it to a host side application that can use Motorola s server based parsing algorithms Download install the software from the Motorola Web site at http www motorola com enterprisemobility support When the Motorola DLL installs on the host server along with a custom driver s license application the Symbol DS6878 digital scanner can read 2D bar codes on standard US driver s licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards to produce formatted data Use this data for age verification credit card application information and more The Motorola driver s license Software Developer Kit SDK available on the Motorola Web site at http www motorola com enterprisemobility support provides scanner software sample code a demo application and Help to develop the application necessary to generate formatted driver s license information As jurisdictional updates become available Motorola updates the DLL on the Motorola Web site Scan the appropriate bar code below to program the digital scanner P e z s No Driver s License Parsing Embedded Driver s License Parsing Server Based Driver s Licens
188. de listed under Beeper Tone on page 5 7 The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters require scanning several bar codes See these parameter descriptions for this procedure Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter User Preferences Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults Table 5 1 lists the defaults for preferences parameters To change the default values e Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 4 Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan configuration program see 123Scan2 on page 12 1 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 5 1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults Parameter om Default dE User Preferences Set Default Parameter Set Defaults 5 4 Parameter Bar Code Scanning ECh Enable 5 5 Beep After Good Decode 38h Enable 5 5 Suppress Power Up Beeps Fih Dih Do Not Suppress 5 6 Beeper Tone 9th Medium 5 7 Beeper Volume 8Ch High 5 8 Beeper Duration F1 74h Medium 5 9 Beep on Insertion FOh 20h Enabled 5 9 Batch Mode Fih 20h Normal Do Not Batch 5 10 Data Low Power Mo
189. e Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E decoded data as UPC E data without conversion Convert UPC E to UPC A Enable 01h Do Not Convert UPC E to UPC A Disable 00h Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Parameter 26h Enable this to convert UPC E1 decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E1 decoded data as UPC E1 data without conversion Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Enable 01h Do Not Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Disable 00h 14 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend Parameter 27h Enable this parameter to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN 8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN 13 symbols Disable this to transmit EAN 8 symbols as is Enable EAN JAN Zero Extend 01h Disable EAN JAN Zero Extend 00h Symbologies 14 21 Bookland ISBN Format Parameter F1h 40h If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 14 9 select one of
190. e Guide Turn On Off Rule Sets continued Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off Turn Off Rule Set 1 Turn Off Rule Set 2 Turn Off Rule Set 3 Turn Off Rule Set 4 Advanced Data Formatting 15 87 Alphanumeric Keyboard IN Space UL III UA LIL DECHE DAIN III Dash 15 88 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Comma amp Advanced Data Formatting 15 89 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued lt gt 15 90 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DIN DI DIN DNA IL DI Underscore Advanced Data Formatting 15 91 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued NOTEDo not confuse the numeric bar codes below with those on the numeric keypad v IA 0 AAN 1 II 2 AAN 3 OU A WU 5 15 92 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DI 6 DIN 7 DI 8 LL 9 UT A AWU Cc Advanced Data Formatting 15 93 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued dl D DIR E UI F DIR G UL H DI l J 15 94 Symbol DS6878 Product Referen
191. e Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled Hardware Handshaking takes precedence e None When this option is selected data is transmitted immediately No response is expected from host e ACK NAK When this option is selected after transmitting data the digital scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host When a NAK is received the digital scanner transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The digital scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time out to receive an ACK or NAK If the digital scanner does not get a response in this time it issues an error indication and discards the data There are no retries when a time out occurs e ENQ When this option is selected the digital scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time out the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time out to prevent transmission errors e ACK NAK with ENQ This combines the two previous options For re transmissions of data due to a NAK from the host an additional ENQ is not required e XON XOFF An XOFF character turns the digital scanner transmission off until the d
192. e Parsing Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 3 Parsing Driver s License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing To begin programming a parsing rule 1 Scan Begin New Drivers License Parse Rule on page 16 4 2 Scan any of the field bar codes on the following pages or Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters on page 16 24 to complete the parsing rule 3 After entering the entire rule scan Save Driver s License Parse Rule on page 16 4 to save the rule af NOTE Only ONE driver s license parsing rule may be stored in memory at any time Saving a new rule replaces the prior rule To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming scan Quit Entering Driver s License Rule on page 16 4 Any previously saved rule is retained To erase a programmed saved rule scan Erase Drivers License Parse Rules on page 16 4 Embedded Driver s License Parsing Criteria Code Type After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver s license you can also apply standard ADF rules to the parsed data using the Parsed Driver s License criterion bar code in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide J NOTE Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver s license data when configured for Embedded Driver s License Parsing See Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example on page 16 21 for a sample ADF rule using this code type cr
193. e Read to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol is left in the digital scanner s field of view It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 0 to 9 9 seconds The default interval is 0 5 seconds To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval in 0 1 second increments Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols Parameter 90h Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to control the time the scanner is inactive between decoding different symbols It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 1 to 9 9 seconds The default is 0 2 seconds To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval in 0 1 second increments Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 5 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Fuzzy 1D Processing Parameter F1h 02h This option is enabled by default to optimize decode performance on 1D bar codes including damaged and poor quality symbols Disable this only if you experience time delays when decoding 2D bar codes or in detecting a no decode Enable Fuzzy 1D Processing 01h
194. e cradle Getting Started 1 11 3 The digital scanner must perform two charge cycles to complete the battery reconditioning process discharge charge discharge charge See Table 1 1 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Table 1 1 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Battery Reconditioning LED Comments Mode Discharging Red Flash Time to discharge is approximately 2 5 hours Charging Green Flash Time to charge is approximately 2 5 hours with an external power supply Reconditioning Complete Green Solid always on The digital scanner enters a trickle charge until the digital scanner is removed from the cradle Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Insert the digital scanner in the cradle so that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner handle touch the contacts on the cradle Push the handle lightly to ensure a proper connection engaging the contacts in the cradle and digital scanner Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob on the back of the cradle is in the correct position for the horizontal or vertical mounting Horizontal Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle horizontally where no fastening is necessary 1 Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage 2 Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1 7 Desk Wall Mount Converter Knob Figure 1 7 Horizontal Mount Inse
195. e custadeens geen stxnasa sack ebdeateccn lt enenian eaueeeenseae 6 4 EE Eeer 6 4 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes cececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 6 5 USB Keystroke EE 6 7 USB CAPS Lock Override EEN 6 7 USB Ignore Unknown Characters 2eeteteskgsetg egenen 6 8 Emulate Keypad E ER 6 8 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution E 6 9 Function Key Mapping WEE 6 9 Simulated Caps De 6 10 Convert CaSe AE 6 10 Optional USB Parameters cic tccssaceccecisictecscsdeedeansstecenadsncnehans lt ceansbedsbintiarsedendtaacsnednessice 6 11 Ignore Beep WEE 6 11 Ignore Bar Code Configuration EE 6 11 ASCII Character Set for USR 6 12 Table of Contents ix Chapter 7 RS 232 Interface MEPS TRON EE 7 1 Connecting an RS 232 Interface E 7 2 RS 232 age 7 3 RS 232 Host EE 7 4 e TYPES EE 7 6 SM KE 7 8 Parn hence ec cc ek as oc ca meee es eee ee a aes 7 9 Stop Bit EE 7 9 Data Bits ASCII Format esere a E E E R E R 7 10 Check Receive Errors lt s cccccnestecctansaakenguactensstasctussbeacteaatanctaqesearanaanecneseacaccersebes 7 11 Hardware Handshaking EE 7 11 Software Handshaking E 7 13 Host Serial Response Time out EE 7 15 RTS Eine EE EE 7 16 Beep E 7 16 Intercharacter RE 7 17 Nixdorf See EC REEEEgeeeeeetiengeen eebe den dee 7 18 Ignore E aere EE 7 18 ASCII Character Set for HG 232 EEN 7 19 Chapter 8 Keyboard Wedge Interface att eie e EE 8 1 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface AAA 8 2 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
196. e digital scanner and remote device from the remote device side Digital Scanner emits three long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full Scan the Code 39 bar code without a leading space or scan Do Not Buffer Code 39 on Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store on page 14 34 to transmit stored Code 29 data Digital Scanner emits four high beeps on trigger release Low battery Place digital scanner in cradle to charge the battery Digital Scanner emits four long low beeps A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting The digital scanner is either Out of range Not paired to the cradle Not connected to a remote Bluetooth device Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device Or Scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle Acknowledgment that transmitted data was not received by the cradle Data may have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Digital Scanner emits five low long beeps Conversion or format error Check ADF rules for the host Decoding Bar Codes Digital Scanner emits the laser but does not decode the bar code Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct bar code type Program the digital scanner to read that type of bar code
197. e eee 4 22 Pairing Bar Code Example sccssicccsescectitesstivesiasseniaeestenetssatecveiesitdenstenerianeavercenieae 4 22 Connection Maintenance Interval ENEE 4 23 KEREN 4 23 Bluetooth Security ee Eege 4 25 Authentication Peat cite cicero ec Geck dessa ee 4 25 PIN COGS EE 4 26 Variable PIN Code E 4 26 eine le EE 4 27 Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options et We EE 5 1 Scanning Sequence ale UE 5 2 Errors While Scanning E 5 2 User Preferences Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults 5 2 User ne 5 4 Default Parameters E 5 4 Parameter Bar Code Scanning AE 5 5 Beep After Good Decode eeneg EeEEEEAEEEEG EE EE 5 5 Suppress Power Up Beeps eegener 5 6 Beep r TONG serssiconinniinennsaa adas eaa aaa aa aeaa a aa aR ai 5 7 Beeper E 5 8 Beeper Duration WE 5 9 Beep on ue d E 5 9 Bateh Mode cea ce ss ae ress ta tease aan ni aa cca a 2a fd dele aces ATENEA 5 10 Modes of Operation eege 5 10 Low Power Mode secs hic cite Fence lace Goer ecee cence een dean decuneeencect 5 12 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode eeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 13 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto AIM 5 14 Hand Held WR tele le EW TE 5 15 Ereegnes 5 16 Mobile Phome Display Klee segs deg Eed 5 17 PDF d dleltluE Ven EE 5 18 viii Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide PDF Prioritization Tue TEE 5 18 eltren 5 19 Unique Bar Code Reporting AAA 5 19 Decode Session Ni 5 20 Timeout Between Decodes
198. e prefix e XXXXXXXXXXXX represents the 12 character Bluetooth address Pairing Bar Code Example If the remote device to which the digital scanner can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11 22 33 44 55 66 then the pairing bar code is Paring Bar Code Content Wl Mul B Bluetooth Address B112233445566 Radio Communications 4 23 Connection Maintenance Interval J NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode see page 4 20 When a digital scanner disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout the digital scanner immediately attempts to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds If the auto reconnect process fails it can be restarted by pulling the digital scanner trigger To guarantee that a disconnected digital scanner can reconnect when it comes back in range the cradle reserves the connection for that digital scanner for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval If the cradle is supporting the maximum three digital scanners and one digital scanner disconnects a fourth digital scanner cannot pair to the cradle during this interval To connect another digital scanner either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle with the new digital scanner or scan Lock Override page 4 20 with the new digital scanner then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle
199. eae tok ne Fee hw ee 15 1 15 11 default rules 0 0 0 15 5 numeric keypad 00 5 15 21 15 22 pad Spaces 200 ee eee 15 34 pad ZeroS pecsi ee 15 38 Reg cetacean ES ba ental Ua dene aves 15 1 rules hierarchy 000s eee eee eee 15 4 send alt characters 15 61 send control characters 15 43 send function key 15 72 send keyboard characters 15 48 send keypad characters 15 67 send preset value 0000 15 32 setup fields 15 27 skip ahead characters 15 29 skip back characters 15 30 space removal 000 e eee eae 15 32 specialcommands 200 00 15 8 specific data string 15 19 turn off rule setS 15 85 15 86 zero removal 2 200e eee eee eee 15 32 aiming options hand held decode aiming pattern 5 23 aiming pattern 2 5 Onabling soarana sua a deeeee sat a R A 5 23 Orientation 2 6 ASCII values keyboard wedge 8 13 DS te o daa d a E EET 7 19 standard defaults F 1 USB EE 6 12 authentication 4 2 4 25 auto reconnect 4 4 4 14 4 19 4 23 bar code defaults CIE A 1 IEN 9 3 keyboard wedge 8 3 radio communication 4 2 RS 282 ee RE Bee 7 3 scanner emulation 2000000 11 3 MS EE 6 3 user preferences 200000 eee 5 2 wand emulation 000 ee aee 10 3 bar codes AAMV
200. ee ee 7 8 been on 7 16 check receive errors 55 7 11 data bils wo ee ee be ee 7 10 hardware handshaking 7 11 7 12 host serial response time out 7 15 host typeS 7 6 ignore unkown characters 7 18 intercharacter delay 7 17 Nixdorf Beep LED options 7 18 RTS line estate 7 16 stop bit select 20 4 7 9 RS 232 parameters DANNY sec Eege deed Ee 7 9 scan data options 5 37 scanner to cradle support 4 18 set defaults 5 4 supplementals 14 10 symbologies default table 2 00000 14 2 time delay to reduced power mode 5 13 timeout between decodes different symbols 5 21 timeout between decodes same symbol 5 21 transmit code ID character 5 35 transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit 14 59 transmit no read message 5 39 transmit UK postal check digit 14 63 transmit US postal check digit 14 62 trigger modes 200 eae 5 14 5 15 UCC coupon extended code 14 22 UK postal sekare akbar gk seeks Pow e os 14 62 unique bar code reporting 5 19 UNPA te dere dE dEr gr cata ei d 4 21 UPC composite mode 14 69 UPC EAN Coupon Code 14 22 supp redundancy 14 13 14 14 UPC EAN JAN supplemental AIM ID format 14 14 supplemental red
201. eference Guide Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 11 Pad Zeros To Length 12 Pad Zeros To Length 13 Pad Zeros To Length 14 Pad Zeros To Length 15 Pad Zeros To Length 16 Pad Zeros To Length 17 Advanced Data Formatting 15 41 Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 18 Pad Zeros To Length 19 Pad Zeros To Length 20 Pad Zeros To Length 21 Pad Zeros To Length 22 Pad Zeros To Length 23 Pad Zeros To Length 24 15 42 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 25 Pad Zeros To Length 26 Pad Zeros To Length 27 Pad
202. el Kartika eRA Ea 4 4 Index 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide standard default parameters 05 F 1 stored data batch mode 5 10 symbology default parameters 14 2 T technical specifications 3 7 troubleshooting 3 2 U unlocked pairing mode 00 005 4 20 UNPACKING N E 1 2 unpairing barcode 0 cece eee 4 21 UPC EAN bar codes bookland EAN 000 cee ee eee 14 9 bookland ISBN 000 eee ee eae 14 21 check don 14 14 14 15 convert UPC E to UPC A 14 19 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 14 19 EAN zero extend 2 0020000 0 14 20 EAN 13 JAN 13 2 0 0 cee eee 14 9 EAN SANS 14 8 ISSN EAN siesta esiema d nr a ae i 14 24 supplementals 14 10 UCC coupon extended code 14 22 HEGER eataa gan mea at a aie dand eed ae eee ENEE 14 7 UPC A preamble 020 0000ee 14 16 UPCE ere ieee kneel eV Ba dean 14 7 UPC E preamble 20 00055 14 17 UP GET ad 30cm ace daa ed eee eee woe E 14 8 USB connection 0 000 eee 6 2 USB defaults 3 we bean NC eee Ree eas 6 3 USB parameters 6 4 user preferences bar codes batch mode 5 10 5 11 beep on insertion 5 9 set defaults 5 4 time delay to reduced power mode 5 13 user preferences defaults 5 2 W wand emulation connection 10 2 11 2 wand emulation defaults 10 3 wand emulation parameters 10 4 Tell Us What You Thi
203. elect the RS 232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS 232 Host Types on page 7 6 5 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 7 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host RS 232 Parameter Defaults RS 232 Interface 7 3 Table 7 1 lists the defaults for RS 232 host parameters If any option needs to be changed scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 7 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 7 1 RS 232 Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number RS 232 Host Parameters RS 232 Host Types Standard 7 6 Baud Rate 9600 7 8 Parity Type None 7 9 Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 7 9 Data Bits ASCII Format 8 Bit 7 10 Check Receive Errors Enable 7 11 Hardware Handshaking None 7 11 Software Handshaking None 7 13 Host Serial Response Time out 2 sec 7 15 RTS Line State Low RTS 7 16 Beep on lt BEL gt Disable 7 16 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 7 17 Nixdorf Be
204. em Character 14 17 UPC E1 Preamble 24h System Character 14 18 Convert UPC E to A 25h Disable 14 19 Table 14 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Symbologies 14 3 Parameter e Default Ph he aa Convert UPC E1 to A 26h Disable 14 19 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend 27h Disable 14 20 Bookland ISBN Format F1h 40h ISBN 10 14 21 UCC Coupon Extended Code 55h Disable 14 22 Coupon Report Fih DAh Old Coupon Format 14 23 ISSN EAN Fih 69h Disable 14 24 Code 128 Code 128 08h Enable 14 25 Set Length s for Code 128 Dih D2h Any Length 14 25 GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 OEh Enable 14 26 ISBT 128 54h Enable 14 27 ISBT Concatenation Fih 4th Disable 14 28 Check ISBT Table F1h 42h Enable 14 29 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy DFh 10 14 29 Code 39 Code 39 00h Enable 14 30 Trioptic Code 39 ODh Disable 14 30 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy Code 56h Disable 14 31 Code 32 Prefix E7h Disable 14 31 Set Length s for Code 39 12h 13h 2 to 55 14 32 Code 39 Check Digit Verification 30h Disable 14 33 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 2Bh Disable 14 33 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11h Disable 14 34 Buffer Code 39 71h Disable 14 34 Code 93 Code 93 09h Disable 14 37 Set Length s for Code 93 1Ah 1Bh 4to 55 14 37 Code 11 Code 11 OAh Disable 14 39 Set Lengths for Code 11 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 14 39 14 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 1
205. ements AKA Social Security Name AKA Full Name AKA Last Name AKA First Name Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 13 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued AKA Middle Name Initial AKA Name Suffix AKA Name Prefix AKA Birth Date Issue Timestamp Number of Duplicates Medical Codes 16 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Organ Donor Nonresident Customer ID Weight Range Document Discriminator Country Federal Commission Codes Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 15 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Place of Birth Audit Information Inventory Control Race Ethnicity Std Vehicle Class Std Endorsements Std Restrictions 16 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Class Description Endorsement Description Restrictions Description Height in Inches Height in Centimeters Parser Version ID Bar Codes Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification Parser Version ID Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 17 Parsing Rule Example Scan the following bar codes in sequence to program the digital scanner to extract and transmit first middle and last names mailing address line 1 mailing address line 2 mailing address city mailing address state mailing address postal code and date of birth Then scan a driver s
206. ence Guide IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address This parameter sets the IBM 468X 469X port used J NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS 485 interface on the digital scanner None Selected Hand held Scanner Emulation Port 9B Non IBM Scanner Emulation Port 5B Table top Scanner Emulation Port 17 lt V NOTE User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection IBM Interface 9 5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39 Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Optional IBM Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved or changed when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override IBM interface defaults Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scanner Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital scanner When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still
207. engths 0 e eee eee 14 37 composite CC A B 22000 00 eeee 14 68 composite CC 14 68 composite TLCap naana 14 69 continuous bar code read 5 19 convert GS1 databar to UPC EAN 14 67 convert UPC E to UPC A 14 19 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 14 19 data mais 14 73 data matrix inverse 14 73 data options pause duration 15 8 decode session timeout 00 5 20 discoverable mode 4 7 decreie 2orb 00000 c eee eee 14 46 nger eener 14 48 drivers license parsing 16 2 field updates 16 23 send control characters 16 24 send keyboard characters 16 29 set defaults 16 24 SOUUP na neste Ae tae Boss 16 4 16 5 16 6 EAN zero extend 2200005 14 20 EAN 13 JAN 13 2 2 0 00000 e eee eee 14 9 EAN SANS 14 8 flush macro buffer abort macro PDF entry 14 81 FN1 substitution values 5 38 fuzzy 1D processing 5 22 GS1 catabar limited 14 66 GS1 Databar 08 aces eed ee ee 14 66 GS1 databar expanded 14 67 GS1 databar 14 0 0 0 00 00 14 66 EICHER EE 14 26 hand held decode aiming pattern 5 23 2 of 5 check digit verification 14 45 2 of 5 convert to EAN 13 14 46 2 of 5 transmit check digit 14 45 IBM 468X 469X convert unknown to code 39 9 5 convert unkown
208. ep LED Options Normal Operation 7 18 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 7 18 7 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide RS 232 Host Parameters Various RS 232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings Table 7 2 Selecting the ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti Omron or terminal sets the defaults listed below Table 7 2 Terminal Specific RS 232 Wincor Wincor Parameter Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti Mode A B OPOS JPOS Transmit Code ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Transmission Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Prefix Data Data Suffix Prefix Data Format Suffix Suffix Suffix CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 ETX 1002 CR 1013 CR 1013 ETX 1002 Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 Parity Even None Odd Odd Even None Even Hardware RTS CTS None RTS CTS RTS CTS None None None Handshaking Option 3 Option 3 Option 3 Software None None None None ACK NAK None None Handshaking Serial Response 9 9 Sec 2 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec Time out Stop Bit Select One One One One One One One ASCII Format 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit Beep On lt BEL gt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable RTS Line State High Low Low Low No data to Low High High send Prefix None None None None STX 1003 None STX 1003 In the Ni
209. er Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital scanner When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed Disable Enable Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable disable code types When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed Disable Enable 6 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for USB Table 6 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1000 U CTRL 2 1001 A CTRLA 1002 B CTRLB 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRL E 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 d CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRLJ 1011 K SE 1012 L CTRL L 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRLN 1015 O CTRL O 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRLQ 1018 R CTRL R 1019 S CTRL S 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U STERU 1022 V CTRL V 1023 w CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 6 13 Table 6 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued
210. er cable into the power port on the back of the cradle and connect the power supply to an approved AC supply refer to the CRO078 S CR0008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide for more information Host Port Power Power Port e Host Port f Power Port Connect to appropriate host Figure 1 5 Connecting the Cables to the Cradle Getting Started 1 7 6 If applicable thread the interface cable over the cable support hook and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves 7 Mount the cradle as necessary For information on mounting the cradle refer to the documentation included with the cradle Ri NOTE Disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host Different cables are required for different hosts The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only The connectors may be different from those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same Supplying Power to the Cradle The cradle receives power from one of two sources e An external power supply e When connected to the host through a host cable that supplies power The cradle detects whether the host or the external supply is supplying power It always draws power from the external supply when available regardless of the presence of power from a host J IMPORTANT For healthcare environments use cradle p n CRO078 SC1009BWR and place the
211. er to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 8 1 A slow continuous flash is estimated at 1 flash per second 2 A fast continuous flash is estimated at 2 flashes per second Table 2 3 Standard Cradle LED Definitions LED Indication Green Cradle is powered Green Flash Cradle is externally powered with a USB host interface that suspended the cradle The cradle is no longer connected to the digital scanner but it will charge the digital scanner Scan the pairing bar code to pair the scanner and cradle see Pairing on page 4 19 Red Flash Transmission error 1 A slow continuous flash is estimated at 1 flash per second A fast continuous flash is estimated at 2 flashes per second Scanning 2 5 Scanning To program the digital scanner see the appropriate host chapter Chapter 4 Radio Communications and Chapter 14 Symbologies In addition to the parameters included in the chapters mentioned user preference and miscellaneous digital scanner option parameters are also available in this guide To scan 1 Ensure all connections are secure see appropriate host chapter 2 Aim the digital scanner at the bar code 3 Press the trigger Figure 2 1 Scanning 4 Upon successful decode the digital scanner beeps and the LED t
212. ers is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character then the digital scanner issues an error beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad When enabled all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A would be sent as ALT make 0 6 5 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation USB Interface 6 9 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device When enabled this allows replacement of any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user see EN Substitution Values on page 5 38 to set the Key Category and Key Value Enable FN1 Substitution Disable FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control key sequences see Table 6 2 on page 6 12 When this parameter is enabled
213. erval to 8 Hours Set Interval to 24 Hours Set Interval to Forever Radio Communications 4 25 Bluetooth Security The digital scanner supports Bluetooth Authentication and Encryption Authentication can be requested by either the remote device or the digital scanner When Authentication is requested the digital scanner uses its programmed PIN code to generate a link key Once Authentication is complete either device may then negotiate to enable Encryption of NOTE A remote device can still request Authentication Authentication To force Authentication with a remote device including the cradle scan the Enable Authentication bar code below To prevent the digital scanner from forcing Authentication scan the Disable Authentication bar code below Enable Authentication Disable Authentication 4 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide PIN Code To set the PIN code e g password on the digital scanner scan the bar code below followed by five alphanumeric programming bar codes see Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes The default PIN code is 12345 If the digital scanner communicates with a cradle with security enabled synchronize the PIN codes on the digital scanner and cradle To achieve this connect the digital scanner to the cradle when setting the PIN codes If the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle the PIN code change only takes affect on the digital scanner If security is required between the digital
214. et for RS 232 Continued ASCII Value DEE ag ce tre ASCII Character 1027 A ESC 1028 B FS 1029 C GS 1030 D RS 1031 E US 1032 Space Space 1033 iA 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 JE 1038 IF amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 1042 1 1043 IK S 1044 IL l 1045 i 1046 1047 JO 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1057 7 7 1056 8 8 RS 232 Interface 7 21 Table 7 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1057 9 9 1058 IZ 1059 oF 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 K l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 7 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 K 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N 2 1095 O 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C C 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104
215. everal bar codes See the individual parameter such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 for this procedure 14 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter Symbology Parameter Defaults Table 14 1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters To change the default values scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts and miscellaneous default parameters Table 14 1 Parameter Defaults Parameter Fanne Default ube e UPC EAN UPC A Oth Enable 14 7 UPC E 02h Enable 14 7 UPC E1 OCh Disable 14 8 EAN 8 JAN 8 04h Enable 14 8 EAN 13 JAN 13 03h Enable 14 9 Bookland EAN 53h Disable 14 9 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 and 5 digits 10h Ignore 14 10 User Programmable Supplementals 14 13 Supplemental 1 Fih 43h Supplemental 2 Fih 44h UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 50h 10 14 13 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Fih AOh Combined 14 14 Transmit UPC A Check Digit 28h Enable 14 14 Transmit UPC E Check Digit 29h Enable 14 15 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 2Ah Enable 14 15 UPC A Preamble 22h System Character 14 16 UPC E Preamble 23h Syst
216. eyboard Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 13 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge J NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair For example when Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled and a B is scanned it is interpreted as b J as and V as Scanning ABC I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC gt Table 8 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set ASCII Value Code 39 ee EE Keystroke 1001 A CTRLA 1002 B CTRLB 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRLE 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRLG 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 l CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRLL 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRLN 1015 O CTRL O 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRL Q 1018 R CTRL R 1019 S CTRL S 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 8 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII eee Code 39 Encode Character bh 1022 V CTRL V 1023 w CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL ESC 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A
217. fault Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Aa GS1 DataBar 14 Disable 14 66 GS1 DataBar Limited Disable 14 66 GS1 DataBar Expanded Disable 14 67 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN Disable 14 67 Composite Composite CC C Disable 14 68 Composite CC A B Disable 14 68 Composite TLC 39 Disable 14 69 UPC Composite Mode Never Linked 14 69 Composite Beep Mode Beep As Each Code Type is 14 70 Decoded GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes Disable 14 70 2D Symbologies PDF417 Enable 14 71 MicroPDF417 Disable 14 71 Code 128 Emulation Disable 14 72 Data Matrix Enable 14 73 Data Matrix Inverse Regular 14 73 Maxicode Disable 14 74 QR Code Enable 14 74 QR Inverse Regular 14 75 MicroQR Enable 14 75 Aztec Enable 14 76 Aztec Inverse Regular 14 76 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 1 14 77 Security Level 0 14 79 Intercharacter Gap Size Normal 14 80 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 11 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Pt hA Report Version Report Software Version 14 80 Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer 1 14 81 Abort Macro PDF Entry 14 81 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 12 Symbol DS6878 Produc
218. ferences Default Parameters The scanner can be reset to two types of defaults factory defaults or custom defaults Scan the appropriate bar code below to reset the scanner to its default settings and or set the scanner s current settings as the custom default e Restore Defaults Resets all default parameters as follows e If custom default values were configured see Write to Custom Defaults the custom default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned e f no custom default values were configured the factory default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned For factory default values see Chapter A Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A 1 e Set Factory Defaults Scan the Set Factory Defaults bar code below to eliminate all custom default values and set the scanner to factory default values For factory default values see Chapter A Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A 1 e Write to Custom Defaults Custom default parameters can be configured to set unique default values for all parameters After changing all parameters to the desired default values scan the Write to Custom Defaults bar code below to configure custom defaults Restore Defaults Set Factory Defaults Write to Custom Defaults User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning Parameter ECh
219. ferrite core included in box with cradle on the power supply refer to the Power Supply Ferrite Installation instructions included in the box Using the USB Interface to Supply Power When the cradle is connected to the host via the USB interface it can be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply Powering from a USB host limits charging The digital scanner charges at a slower rate than when charging from an external power supply J NOTE The radio link functions normally when the cradle draws power from a USB host Lost Connection to Host If scanned data does not transmit to the cradle s host ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet If scanned data still does not transmit to the host reestablish a connection with the host 1 Disconnect the power supply from the cradle 2 Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle Wait three seconds Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle Reconnect the power supply to the cradle if required o ao FP Q Reestablish pairing with the cradle by scanning the pairing bar code ff NOTE The CR0078 S does not always require a power supply whereas the CRO008 S always requires a power supply 1 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Mounting the Cradle For information on mounting the cradle refer to the documentation included with the cradle Getting Started 1 9 Replacing the Digi
220. figuratioNS eege EAn EAEE Eaa ENEFA SEFALETE ERR EARE EEES EERS xvii Chapter Eeer eege eg xvii Notational CONVENTIONS tirn tn krura tkk nae tt kk rann nnn nnan aee tananan xviii R lated Re el xix Service Information xix Chapter 1 Getting Started WATT COI WEE 1 1 REESEN dcnna aea i a RE E N R ERA 1 2 Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle 0 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeee 1 2 Eegenen 1 3 Scanner oaas ee ee ee Se rer eee crt erer re errr 1 3 Re E 1 4 ee Cradle eege eege 1 6 Connecting the Cradle sd ecicessaientencetesersatecececasssandaveatensddestatvedanaenteevestediadaedesnended secs 1 6 Supplying Power to RE TE 1 7 Using the USB Interface to Supply Power AE 1 7 L st Connection to HOSE isiin R R E 1 7 leier duer 1 8 Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery scicsccccecsscctececsscecstendcirasensacoomialahtecs mabenteteasepeeanede 1 9 Charging the Digital Scanner Battery ccccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeneeeeeeenees 1 10 Charging LED E 1 10 Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery AE 1 10 Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeenees 1 10 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeririrrrrensrrrrrnrrsnsrrreenna 1 11 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle ecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeesnaeeeeeeea 1 11 Horizontal Cradle Mount ccccccceeccccececceeccccececcesecaceeec
221. fix suffix programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 37 These rules reside in the same rule list as ADF Rules so the order you create them is also important Default Rules Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data Units with custom software may have one or more default rules burned in The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first then the default rules Disable default rules by entering the following general rule in the user programmable buffer When receiving scan data send all data Since this rule always applies ADF never applies the default rules 15 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide ADF Bar Codes Table 15 1 lists the bar codes available through ADF Table 15 1 ADF Bar Codes Parameter mal A Special Commands 15 8 Pause Duration 15 8 Begin New Rule 15 8 Save Rule 15 8 Erase 15 9 Quit Entering Rules 15 9 Disable Rule Set 15 10 Criteria 15 11 Code Types 15 11 Code Lengths 15 15 1 Character 6 Characters 15 15 7 Characters 13 Characters 15 16 14 Characters 20 Characters 15 17 21 Characters 27 Characters 15 18 28 Characters 30 Characters 15 19 Specific String at Start 15 19 Specific String Any Location 15 20 Any Message OK 15 20 Numeric Keypad 15 21 Rule Belongs To Set 15 23 Actions 15 24 Send Data 15 24 Send Data Up To Character 15 24 Send Next Ch
222. ftware or Products that is used in the Motorola Product are disclosed in the Commercial Third Party Licenses or via the respective Commercial Third Party Publicly Available Software Legal Notices Publicly available software list Name Regular Expression Evaluator Version 8 3 Description Compiles and executes regular expressions Software Site http www freebsd org cgi cvsweb cgi src lib libc regex Source Code No Source Distribution Obligations Motorola will not provide nor distribute the Source Code for the Regular Expression Evaluator License BSD Style License 1992 Henry Spencer 1992 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Henry Spencer of the University of Toronto Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Ber
223. g and on page 13 20 that trigger the start of output e tis one or more template characters 13 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator Template Incoming data Output P0A9999 BPN3 456 3456 PN1234 PN1234 5341 5341 Template Incoming data Output PO PN 9999 PN3456 3456 5341 5341 PNPN7654 7654 Repeat Previous R R This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times allowing the capture of variable length scanned data The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required digits Template Incoming data Output AA9R AB3 AB3 PN12345 PN12345 32RM52700 No output Scroll Until Match S This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template S Template Incoming data Output s99999 AB3 No Output PN12345 12345 32RM52700 52700 OCR Programming 13 25 Template Examples Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition Field Definition Description M 99977 M followed by three digits and two optional digits X 997777 X X followed by two digits four optional digits and an X 9959775599 Two digits followed by any character a digit two optional digits any two characters and two digits A55 999 99 A letter followed by two characters a dash three digits a dash an
224. g a rule belonging to an alternate rule set In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes on page 15 10 Rules Hierarchy in Bar Codes The order of programming individual rules is important Program the most general rule first All programmed rules are stored in a buffer As they are programmed they are stored at the top of a rules list If you create three rules the list is configured as follows Third Rule Second Rule First Rule When you scan data the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria matches and therefore if the actions occur Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds Be sure to program the most general rule first For example if the THIRD rule states When scanning a bar code of any length send all data then send the ENTER key And the SECOND rule states When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12 send the first four characters then send the ENTER key then send all remaining data and you scan a Code 128 bar code of length 12 the THIRD rule applies and the SECOND rule appears to not function Advanced Data Formatting 15 5 Note that using the standard data editing functions also creates ADF rules Scan options are entered as ADF rules and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them For the digital scanner this applies to pre
225. git user defined prefixes Set the 3 digit prefixes using User Programmable Supplementals on page 14 13 e Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or the user defined prefix set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 14 13 e Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or one of the two user defined prefixes set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 14 13 J NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters Symbologies 14 11 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals continued Decode UPC EAN JAN Only With Supplementals 01h Ignore Supplementals 00h Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 02h Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode 04h Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode 05h Enable 977 Supplemental Mode 07h 14 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals continued Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode 06h Enable 491 Supplemental Mode 08h Enable Smart Supplemental Mode 03h Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 09h Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 OAh Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 OBh Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 0Ch Symbologies 14 13 User Programmable Supplementals Supp
226. gital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 Radio Communications Radio Communications Host Types continued Cradle Host Serial Port Profile Master Serial Port Profile Slave Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave 4 5 4 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Technology Profile Support With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support the cradle is not required for wireless communication The digital scanner communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology The digital scanner supports the standard Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP and HID Profiles which enable the digital scanner to communicate with other Bluetooth devices that support these profiles e SPP the digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection e HID the digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard Master Slave Set Up The digital scanner can be set up as a Master or Slave When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave it is discoverable and connectable to other devices When the digital
227. haracter of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E1 check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 00h 14 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC A Preamble Parameter 22h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC A preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code CO for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 00h System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 02h Symbologies 14 17 UPC E Preamble Parameter 23h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E preamble to the host device tr
228. he host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host and an error beep sounds Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Enable Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Disable Emulate Keypad When enabled all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A is sent as ALT make 0 6 5 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation 4 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Keyboard ENT Substitution When enabled this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user See ENT Substitution Values on page 5 38 to set the Key Category and Key Value Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution HID Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences When this parameter is enabled the keys i
229. he value to two bytes by adding 00 before the parameter number Defining Multicode Expression Notes When defining multicode expressions consider the following e Use the Code Type specifier if there are bar codes of more than one code type in view e Always use the Region specifier when there are multiple bar codes of the same code type e When transmission order is important the first element in the expression transmits first use either type to define the order e When there are unwanted bar codes in view filter them out in one of two ways e Use Code Type to specify only the target bar codes e Use Region to identify only the target bar codes e Ifthe expression does not contain a Region specifier scanning angle and distance do not matter If you specify a region you must scan in a fixed orientation and at a fixed distance Because of this it is preferable to use the Code Type specifier rather than the Region specifier e When defining regions e Defining a region much larger than the bar code improves tolerance to scan distance and angle but can cause a decode of a nearby bar code instead of the target bar code Therefore for best performance define larger regions when only a few bar codes are in view and those in view are widely separated e Defining a region close to or smaller than the target bar code improves the probability of decoding this bar code rather than one nearby but scan distance and angle must be more accurate The
230. his to transmit the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires See Decode Session Timeout on page 5 20 Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode J NOTE f you enable Transmit No Read and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 5 35 the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Enable No Read 01h Disable No Read 00h 5 40 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 6 USB Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a USB host The digital scanner cradle connects directly to a USB host or a powered USB hub The USB host can power the cradle and recharge the digital scanner battery but this charging method has limitations See Using the USB Interface to Supply Power on page 1 7 Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks wi Indicates Default North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature Option 6 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting a USB Interface J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner crad
231. hout the programming bar code menus asterisks wi indicate default values Key Indicates Default Disable OCR A Feature Option J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging 13 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Parameter Defaults Table 13 1 lists the defaults for OCR parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 13 3 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 13 1 OCR Programming Default Table Parameter Number Default Page Number Parameter OCR Programming Parameters OCR A Fih A8h Disable 13 3 OCR A Variant Fih ACh Full ASCII 13 3 OCR B Fih A9h Disable 13 5 OCR B Variant Fih ADh Full ASCII 13 6 MICR E13B Fih AAh Disable 13 9 US Currency Fih ABh Disable 13 10 OCR Orientation Fih AFh 0 13 10 OCR Lines Eih B3h 1 13 12 OCR Minimum Characters Fih Bih 3 13 12 OCR Maximum Characters F1h B2h 100 13 13 OCR Security Level Fih 2Ah 80 13 13 OCR Subset Fih AEh Selected font 13 14 variant OCR Quiet Zone Fih B7h 50 13 14 OCR Bright Illumination Fih BDh Disable 13 15 OCR Template E
232. iet Zone A clear space containing no dark marks which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character QWERTY A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards QWERTY refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys R Reflectance Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface Resolution The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method RF Radio Frequency RS 232 An Electronic Industries Association EIA standard that defines the connector connector pins and signals used to transfer data serially from one device to another S Scan Area Area intended to contain a symbol Scanner An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol Its three main components are 1 Light source laser or photoelectric cell illuminates a bar code 2 Photodetector registers the difference in reflected light more light reflected from spaces 3 Signal conditioning circuit transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern Scanning Mode The scanner is energized programmed and ready to read a bar code Scanning Sequence A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus Self Checking Co
233. ight Black HC Configuration Healthcare White Performance Characteristics Light Source Aiming Pattern 650 nm laser diode Illumination 630 nm LED Frame Rate Decode Mode Up to 60 fps Radio Range Minimum 33 ft 10m Typical warehouse environment 50 ft 15m Battery Specifications 720maH NiMH 3 AAA number of scans per full charge typically 8 500 1 scan second Charge Time Fully discharged battery lt 3 hours via external power approximately 5 5 hours via host power through cable Roll Tolerance 360 Pitch Tolerance 60 Yaw Tolerance 60 Nominal Working Distance See Decode Ranges on page 2 7 Decode Capability UPC EAN and with supplementals Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Tri optic Code 39 GS1 DataBar Variants GS1 128 Code 128 Code 128 Full ASCII Code 93 Codabar NW1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 MSI Codell IATA Bookland EAN Code 32 Interfaces Supported See Table 3 3 User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Drop Specifications Withstands multiple 6 ft 1 8 m drops to concrete at room temperature Withstands multiple 5 ft 1 5m drops to concrete at 0 to 50 C of Cradle Insertions
234. ight Control Key eet 15 79 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters ssesesesesseeeseneerssrrrsserrnnerrnnensrnne 15 80 Tura On Off E 15 85 Alphanumeric Keyboard os gegeeeegee gereegelt eteeegEee eene deeg 15 87 Chapter 16 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL INTOdUCHON ME 16 1 Drivers License Parsing E 16 2 Parsing Driver s License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing 16 3 Embedded Driver s License Parsing Criteria Code Type eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 3 Drivers License Parse Field Bar Codes AAA 16 4 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes ccccccceccceeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeceneeeeeeneeeeeesaeeeeeenieeeeeeneees 16 7 Parsing Rule ome E 16 17 Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example cceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 21 Field Update Procedure E 16 23 User ee 16 24 Sel Default Parameter kg n a REEE R 16 24 Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters eceeeeeee 16 24 Rue 16 24 Keyboard ene 16 29 Xvi Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix A Standard Default Parameters Appendix B Programming Reference Symbol Code ldentifiers eugeusegegeegeugge geseent Eege Ern Eege B 1 EE ee B 3 Appendix C Sample Bar Codes Ee a 39 EE C 1 EP GAIN EE C 1 UPC A Lal KE C 1 Se Eel 100 ia ee a a a C 2 e a E E ee E E E EE E E EE EE E AE EEA C 2 Interleaved ee Ee EE C 2 EH BF 1 s ET C 3 GS1 DataBar 14 esaii ala a a a a a a aa E a Ea
235. igital Scanner emits five long low beep after a bar code is decoded Conversion or format error was detected The digital scanner s conversion parameters are not properly configured Ensure the digital scanner s conversion parameters are properly configured Conversion or format error was detected An ADF rule was set up with characters that can t be sent for the host selected Change the ADF rule or change to a host that can support the ADF rule Conversion or format error was detected A bar code was scanned with characters that can t be sent for that host Change the bar code or change to a host that can support the bar code 3 5 3 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Host Displays Host displays scanned data Digital Scanner is not Ensure the proper host is selected incorrectly programmed to work with the Scan the appropriate host type host programming bar code For RS 232 ensure the digital scanner s communication parameters match the host s settings For a USB HID keyboard or Keyboard Wedge configuration ensure the system is programmed for the correct keyboard type and language and turn off the CAPS LOCK key Ensure editing options e g ADF UPC E to UPC A Conversion are properly programmed Check the digital scanner s host type parameters or editing options
236. igital scanner receives an XON character There are two situations for XON XOFF e XOFF is received before the digital scanner has data to send When the digital scanner has data to send it waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for an XON character before transmission If the XON is not received within this time the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data e XOFF is received during a transmission Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte When the digital scanner receives an XON character it sends the rest of the data message The digital scanner waits up to 30 seconds for the XON 7 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Software Handshaking continued None ACK NAK E NQ ACK NAK with ENQ XON XOFF RS 232 Interface 7 15 Host Serial Response Time out This parameter specifies how long the digital scanner waits for an ACK NAK ENQ XON or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred Minimum 2 sec Low 2 5 sec Medium 5 sec High 7 5 sec Maximum 9 9 sec 7 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide RTS Line State This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line Scan a bar code below to
237. ih 23h 54R 13 16 OCR Check Digit Modulus F1h BOh 1 13 25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier Fih BCh 121212121212 13 26 OCR Check Digit Validation Fih B6h None 13 27 OCR Programming 13 3 OCR Programming Parameters Enable Disable OCR A Parameter Eih A8h To enable or disable OCR A scan one of the following bar codes Enable OCR A Disable OCR A OCR A Variant Parameter F1 ACh Font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font To choose a variant scan one of the following bar codes Selecting the most appropriate font variant optimizes performance and accuracy OCR A supports the following variants e OCR A Full ASCII 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Reserved 1 0123456789ABC DEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Reserved 2 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Banking 0123456789 lt gt YA Special banking characters output as the following representative characters Y outputs as f cl outputs as c JP outputs as h J NOTE Enable OCR A before setting this parameter If disabling OCR A set the variant to its default OCR A Full ASCII 13 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR A Variant continued OCR A Full ASCII 00h OCR A Reserved 1 01h
238. ions or activate different features This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features The digital scanner ships with the settings in also see for all host device and miscellaneous defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when you power down the digital scanner i NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging If not using a USB cable select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connecting to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks ES indicate default values A I Feature Option Indicates Default Enable Decode Aiming Pattern 02h Option Hex Value for programming via SSI command 5 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to set the beeper tone to high scan the High Frequency beeper tone bar co
239. ir connect when the pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned A second method pairs the digital scanner and cradle when the digital scanner is inserted in the cradle To enable this feature scan Enable Pair On Contacts below With this feature enabled it is not necessary to scan the pairing bar code on the cradle If the pairing is successful a low high connection beep sequence sounds a few seconds after the digital scanner is placed in the cradle See Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 for other beep sequences To enable or disable pairing on contacts scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Pair On Contacts Disable Pair on Contacts Unpairing Unpair the digital scanner from the cradle or PC host to make the cradle available for pairing with another digital scanner Scan the bar code below to disconnect the digital scanner from its cradle PC host An unpairing bar code is also included in the Symbol DS6878 Quick Reference Guide Unpairing 4 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pairing Bar Code Format When the digital scanner is configured as an SPP Master you must create a pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth device to which the digital scanner can connect The Bluetooth address of the remote device must be known Pairing bar codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows lt Fnc 3 gt BXXXXXXXXXXXX where e B or LNKB is th
240. it 0 Example A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as X0412356 Code 128 0 Standard data packet no Function code 1 in first symbol position 1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position 2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position Example A Code EAN 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position AIMID is transmitted as C1AIMID 12o0f5 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has validated check digit 3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit Example An 2 of 5 bar code without check digit 4123 is transmitted as 104123 Codabar 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has checked check digit 3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission Example A Codabar bar code without check digit 4123 is transmitted as F04123 Code 93 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as G0012345678905 MSI 0 Check digits are sent 1 No check digit is sent Example An MSI bar code 4123 with a single check digit checked is transmitted as 1M14123 Programming Reference B 5 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option D2o0f5 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123 is transmitted as S04123 UPC EAN 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format i e 13 digits for UPC A UPC E and EAN 13 not including supplemental dat
241. iterion 16 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule Save Driver s License Parse Rule Quit Entering Driver s License Rule Erase Driver s License Parse Rules Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 5 Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes continued The parse fields currently supported begin below Not all IDs present data in the same format For example some IDs may have separate fields for first name last name and middle initial and others may have a single field with the entire name In addition some IDs may expire on the subject s birth date and the actual expiration date field may only indicate the year In order to present data in a consistent format the following nine bar codes return data that may be calculated from the actual data contained within the ID bar code First Name Middle Name Initial L ast Name Name Suffix Name Prefix Expiration Date Birth Date 16 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes continued Issue Date ID Number Formatted Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 16 7 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes dude AAMVA Issuer ID dd d Full Name dd AU Last Name UDO
242. ith asterisks CH Indicates Default Pair on Contacts Feature Option Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter 4 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Parameter Defaults Table 4 1 lists the defaults for radio communication parameters If you wish to change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Radio Communications Parameters section beginning on page 4 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 4 41 Radio Communication Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Bluetooth Host Host Type Cradle Host 4 4 Discoverable Mode General 4 7 Country Keyboard Types Country Code North American 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay 0 msec 4 10 CAPS Lock Override Disable 4 10 Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 4 11 Emulate Keypad Disable 4 11 Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 4 12 Function Key Mapping Disable 4 12 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 4 13 Convert Case No Case Conversion 4 13 Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec 4 15 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard On Bar Code Data 4 17 Emul
243. k digit Transmit MSI Check Digit s Enable 01h Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit s Disable 00h Symbologies 14 55 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit MOD 10 MOD 11 00h MOD 10 MOD 10 01h Chinese 2 of 5 Enable Disable Chinese 2 of 5 To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Chinese 2 of 5 01h Disable Chinese 2 of 5 00h 14 56 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Matrix 2 of 5 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 5 To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Matrix 2 of 5 01h Disable Matrix 2 of 5 00h Symbologies 14 57 Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete
244. keley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AG IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Motorola Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www motorola com enterprisemobility Warranty The complete Motorola hardware product warranty statement is available at http www motorola com enterprisemobility warranty Revision History Changes to the original manual are listed below Change Description 01 Rev A 4 2010 Initial release Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Waranty dee Ee iii Revision e EE iii About This Guide roduc le EE xvii C n
245. kes several seconds for the digital scanner to re initialize the radio at which time scanning is enabled Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range it immediately attempts to reconnect While the digital scanner attempts to reconnect the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails the digital scanner emits a page timeout beep long low long high and stops blinking the LED The process can be restarted by pulling the trigger The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default When enabled the digital scanner emits 5 short high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress Radio Communications 4 15 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Reconnect Attempt Interval When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range it immediately attempts to reconnect for the default time interval of 30 seconds This time interval can be changed to one of the following options e 30 seconds e 1 minute e 5 minutes e 30 minutes e 1 hour e Indefinitely To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval scan one of the bar codes below Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes 4 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Reconnect Attempt Interval continued Attempt to Rec
246. kip ahead n characters 0 15 27 field parsing bar codes 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 skip ahead characters 15 29 NEE 16 11 16 12 16 13 skip back n characters 15 27 EZE 16 14 16 15 16 16 skip back characters 15 30 ACCESSOIICS 1 eee 1 15 space removal 15 32 laMyard EE 1 15 specialcommands 15 8 ACIONS Ate what bead Mea eee ee 15 2 specific data String a 0siav ss eave dw ve 15 19 ADE EE 15 1 specific string SC Heng EE eee Salle Pe Ds 15 1 15 24 any location NEE 15 20 move Cursor 0000 00008 15 28 any message Ok 15 20 send data cece ee eee eee 15 24 atstat EE 15 19 setup fields EE 15 27 rule belongs to set 000 15 23 alphanumeric keyboard 15 87 transmit EEN 3 3 alternate rule seis 15 3 turn off rule sets 0e0008 15 85 15 86 bar code het 15 6 zero removal 00c cee eee ee eee nae 15 32 bar code menu example 15 2 advanced data formatting 3 3 10 7 15 1 DOOD oe eee eee 15 43 EE 15 1 15 24 code lengths EE 15 15 alphanumeric keyboard 15 87 code types EA EEN alain ein hae Ne 15 11 alternate rule seis 15 3 Index 7 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide bar code menu example 15 2 Deep afitdatitatdndoiw ena denne 15 43 code lengths 15 15 code types 6 2 2 eee eee eee 15 11 CHETAN ressa
247. l scanner tries to reconnect for the period of time specified by the Reconnect Attempt Interval setting During that time the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails due to page time outs the digital scanner sounds a page timeout beep long low long high and enters low power mode The auto reconnect process can be re started by pulling the digital scanner trigger If the auto reconnect process fails because the remote device rejects the connection attempt the digital scanner sounds a connection reject beep sequence see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 and deletes the remote pairing address If this happens a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote device J NOTE f a bar code is scanned while the auto reconnect sequence is in process a transmission error beep sequence sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host After a connection is reestablished normal scanning operation returns For error beep sequence definitions see Beeper Definitions on page 2 1 The digital scanner has memory available for storing a remote Bluetooth address for each Master mode SPP Cradle When switching between these modes the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to the last device it was connected to in that mode J NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code page 4 4 causes the radio to be reset Scanning is disabled during this time It ta
248. le Code 39 Check Digit 00h Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Parameter 2Bh Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Enable 01h Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 00h J NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function 14 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Parameter 11h Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 Full ASCII 01h Disable Code 39 Full ASCII 00h af NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host dependent and is therefore described in the ASCII Character Set Table for the appropriate interface See the ASCII Character Set for USB on page 6 12 or the ASCII Character Set for RS 232 on page 7 19 Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store This feature allows the digital scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols Selecting the Scan and Store option Buffer Code 39 temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a fir
249. le for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds To perform Wand Emulation connect the cradle to a portable data terminal or a controller which collects the wand data and interprets it for the host Wand Port we Interface Cable Mobile Computer Figure 10 1 Wand Emulation Connection To connect the Wand Emulation interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cradle on page 1 6 2 Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or controller 3 Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types on page 10 4 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 10 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanne
250. le pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds Interface Cable USB Series A Connector Figure 6 1 USB Connection The digital scanner cradle connects with USB capable hosts including e Desktop PCs and Notebooks e Apple iMac G4 iBooks North America only e IBM SurePOS terminals e Sun IBM and other network computers that support more than one keyboard The following operating systems support the digital scanner cradle through USB e Windows 98 2000 ME XP e MacOS 8 5 and above e IBM 4690 OS The digital scanner cradle also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices HID For more information on USB technology hosts and peripheral devices visit www symbol com usb To connect the USB interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cradle on page 1 6 USB Interface 6 3 2 Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal 3 Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 6 4 4 On first installation when using Wind
251. led e Separate UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as JE lt 0 or 4 gt lt data gt JE lt 1 or 2 gt supp data e Combined EAN 8 with supplementals transmit as E4 lt data gt E lt 1 or 2 gt supp data All other UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as JE3 lt data supps gt Separate 00h Combined 01h Transmit UPC A Check Digit Parameter 28h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC A check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC A Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit 00h Symbologies 14 15 Transmit UPC E Check Digit Parameter 29h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC E Check Digit 00h Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit Parameter 2Ah The check digit is the last c
252. lemental 1 Parameter F1h 43h Supplemental 2 Parameter F1h 44h If you selected a Supplemental User Programmable option from Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 14 10 select User Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 Select User Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 User Programmable Supplemental 1 User Programmable Supplemental UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy Parameter 50h If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplemenials this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission The range is from two to thirty times Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC EAN JAN symbols with and without supplementals The default is 10 Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value Next scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 14 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Parameter F1h AOh Select an output format when reporting UPC EAN JAN bar codes with supplementals with AIM ID enab
253. llustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults Table 8 1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 8 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 8 1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table Parameter Default e Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles 8 4 Country Types Country Codes North American 8 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 8 6 Keystroke Delay No Delay 8 7 Intra Keystroke Delay Disable 8 7 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 8 8 Caps Lock On Disable 8 8 Caps Lock Override Disable 8 9 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 8 9 Function Key Mapping Disable 8 10 FN1 Substitution Disable 8 10 Send and Make Break Send 8 11 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection 8 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Types Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles
254. mit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes C1 if the first codeword is 903 905 C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 JC if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes L3 if the first codeword is 903 905 L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation J NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906 907 912 914 and 915 are not supported Use GS1 Composites instead Enable Code 128 Emulation 01h Disable Code 128 Emulation 00h Symbologies 14 73 Data Matrix Parameter FOh 24h To enable or disable Data Matrix scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Data Matrix 01h Disable Data Matrix 00h Data Matrix Inverse Parameter F1h 4Ch This parameter sets the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h 14 74 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Maxicode
255. mplete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to three hours using external power and up to five hours using non external cable power CAUTION To avoid a battery temperature fault always charge the battery in the digital scanner within the recommended temperature of 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Charging LED When powered up the cradle LED is always green The digital scanner LED flashes a green during charging See Table 2 2 on page 2 3 for all charging LED indications Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery To shut off the NiMH battery for long term storage or shipping Battery Off 1 Scan Battery Off bar code below 2 To turn the battery back on place the digital scanner in the cradle Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery To maintain optimal performance of the digital scanner NiMH battery perform a battery recondition approximately once a year To begin the battery recondition cycle 1 Scan Battery Recondition below Battery Recondition 2 Place the digital scanner into the cradle gJ NOTE f the scanner is removed from the cradle during the battery reconditioning cycle the scanner exits the battery reconditioning mode of operation and returns to the normal mode of battery charging see Charging the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 10 To restart the battery reconditioning cycle re scan the Battery Recondition parameter and place the scanner in th
256. n bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping see Table 6 2 on page 6 12 Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping Radio Communications 4 13 Simulated Caps Lock When enabled the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert All to LowerCase 4 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Auto reconnect Feature When in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication This can happen if the digital scanner goes out of range with the remote device or if the remote device powers down The digita
257. n Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes ccceeeeeeeeeeees 14 70 PID SVD e EE 14 71 Enabl Disable POAT octet cates ee ee eee 14 71 Eriable Disable MicroPDF447 siacscc cic cxtenscclensceeeiny dala gEgeg EE ee deed 14 71 Code 128 EMUlAtOM ee 14 72 Data Eu rescata EAEra AAEE AE ESR ESEE FE ERAL EERE E REEERE RARE 14 73 Data Matix I SIS Ss cies ess a a a BAe ee ae ee 14 73 MAXIGOGG sainctsisesddesctnaadidirastananiebisdisloasdaerialanevasduasviaaidiaeidaanterviststebal beadvtawnnaa a daucadt Ges 14 74 OR COG E 14 74 ROTA E 14 75 Lee EN 14 75 ET 14 76 Ale Joveteg ot eg ei e hike at eene dee RER Teale aden 14 76 Redundancy Level egene 14 77 Redundancy Level egene edd geed 14 77 Red ndancy E 14 77 Redundancy Level EE 14 77 Redundancy Level 4 sinisrsiiirniieiae aa E eee 14 78 Sec rity EE 14 79 Intercharacter E 14 80 Report Versi n eee igesgrbeet Eet Eeer 14 80 Macro PDF Features sccccctictestasteratidantiierscunntaderantndatecsnxcevexuieeuaccancentaecanadaeitaneantercdue 14 81 Flush Macro TEE 14 81 Abort Macro PDF Entry siccssicssctinncumeviaeunticentedsice tanta racins a a a 14 81 Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting ele ie e E 15 1 Rules Criteria Linked to Ee 15 1 Using RTE 15 2 ADF Bar Code Menu E 15 2 Rule 1 The Code 128 Scanning Rule EE 15 3 Rule 2 The UPC Scanning AT EE 15 3 Alternate Rule Sets ges chert deene 15 3 Rules Hierarchy in Bar Codes desse eege eege AER 15 4 Default RUES eebe 15 5 ADF Bar CodeS
258. n is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default ee Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern Enable 5 23 Decoding Illumination Enable 5 24 Multicode Mode Disable 5 24 Multicode Expression 1 5 25 Multicode Mode Concatenation Disable 5 31 Multicode Concatenation Symbology Concatenate as PDF417 5 32 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character None 5 36 Prefix Value 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 36 Suffix 1 Value 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 36 Suffix 2 Value Scan Data Transmission Format Data as is 5 37 FN1 Substitution Values Set 5 38 Transmit No Read Message Disable 5 39 USB Host Parameters USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 6 4 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes North American 6 5 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 6 7 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 6 7 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send 6 8 Emulate Keypad Disable 6 8 USB FN1 Substitution Disable 6 9 Function Key Mapping Disable 6 9 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 6 10 Convert Case No Case Conversion 6 10 Ignore Beep Disable 6 11 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 6 11 A 3 RS 232 Host Parameters 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide
259. nabled is transmitted as JL2ABCD Programming Reference B 7 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option Data Matrix 0 ECC 000 140 not supported 1 ECC 200 2 ECC 200 FNC1 in first or fifth position 3 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position 4 ECC 200 ECI protocol implemented 5 ECC 200 FNC1 in first or fifth position ECI protocol implemented 6 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position ECI protocol implemented MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 ECI protocol implemented 3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 ECI protocol implemented in secondary message QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol 1 Model 2 MicroQR symbol ECI protocol not implemented 2 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented 3 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in first position 4 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in first position 5 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in second position 6 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in second position Aztec 0 Aztec symbol C Aztec Rune symbol B 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix C Sample Bar Codes Code 39 3ABC UPC EAN UPC A 100 hh C 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide EAN 13 100 Code
260. ncel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan D 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability J NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for D 2 of 5 applications 14 48 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 continued D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 Length Within Range D 2 of 5 Any Length Symbologies 14 49 Codabar NW 7 Enable Disable Codabar To enable or disable Codabar scan
261. ne Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar of the scan in milliseconds The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec This parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins J NOTE 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain however 200 msec is sufficient 80 msec 140 msec 200 msec 10 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Polarity Scan a bar code below to select the polarity required by the decoder Polarity determines how the cradle s Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Bar code Pattern DBP DBP is a digital signal that represents the scanned bar code Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format The DBP either has the highs represent bars and the lows represent spaces margins or the highs represent spaces margins and the lows represent bars Bar High Margin Low Bar Low Margin High Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not
262. ned data numeric value is 132459 check digit is 9 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 9 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 4 Product 6 15 8 12 10 9 Productadd 6 15 8 12 10 9 60 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 the remainder is 0 Product Add Right to Left Digit Add Left to Right 01h Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13 26 Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6 Product 1 6 6 16 25 36 Digit add 1 6 6 146 245 34 6 36 The Check Digit Modulus is 12 It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 the remainder is 0 Digit Add Left to Right 04h OCR Programming 13 29 Digit Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the
263. ngths for Codabar 5 to 55 14 49 CLSI Editing Disable 14 51 NOTIS Editing Disable 14 51 MSI MSI Disable 14 52 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 9 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Bt Bs el Set Length s for MSI 2 to 55 14 52 MSI Check Digits One 14 54 Transmit MSI Check Digit Disable 14 54 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10 Mod 10 14 55 Chinese 2 of 5 Enable Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Disable 14 55 Matrix 2 of 5 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Disable 14 56 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 1 Length 14 14 57 Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy Disable 14 58 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 14 58 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 14 59 Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 14 59 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D Regular 14 60 Postal Codes US Postnet Disable 14 61 US Planet Disable 14 61 Transmit US Postal Check Digit Enable 14 62 UK Postal Disable 14 62 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Enable 14 63 Japan Postal Disable 14 63 Australian Postal Disable 14 64 Netherlands KIX Code Disable 14 64 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail Disable 14 65 UPU FICS Postal Disable 14 65 GS1 DataBar 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard De
264. nk We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 627 7184 or mail to Motorola Inc One Motorola Plaza M S B 10 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 Attention Technical Publications Manager Advanced Data Capture Division Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above A Important If you need product support please call the appropriate customer support number for your area Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual CT Very familiar C1 Slightly familiar CT Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Thank you for your input We value your comments Q MOTOROLA Motorola Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 USA 1 800 927 9626 http www motorola com enterprisemobility MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the U S Patent and Trademark Office All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners Motorola Inc 2010 72E 131700 01 Revision A April 2010
265. not sent to the decoder and a convert error beep sounds Ignore Unknown Characters Convert Error On Unknown Characters Leading Margin Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration 1 ms Leading Margin 2 ms Leading Margin 3 ms Leading Margin 11 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Leading Margin continued 5 ms Leading Margin 10 ms Leading Margin Check For Decode LED The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully decoded the transmitted bar code Some decoders however do not assert the Decode signal In this case the digital scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted Scan the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps Check For Decode LED Ignore Decode LED Introduction 123Scan is an easy to use PC based software tool that enables rapid and easy customized setup of Symbol scanners by Motorola 123Scan uses a wizard tool to guide users through a streamlined set up process Settings are saved ina configuration file that can be distributed via e mail electronically downloaded via a USB cable or used to generate a sheet of scannable programming bar codes Additionally 123Scan can upgrade scanner firmware
266. ns For check digit validation each character in scanned data has an equivalent weight used in the check digit calculation DS9808 OCR ships with the following weight equivalents CH ll ll ll ll CH oOo N OOF Go M ll ON OOF WD 9 9 All other characters are equivalent to one 1 You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default 121212121212 default A 10 B 11 C 12 D 13 E 14 F 15 G 16 H 17 1 18 J 19 M 22 N 23 O 24 P 25 Q 26 R 27 S 28 T 29 U 30 V 31 W 32 X 33 Y 34 Z 35 Space 0 123456789A for ISBN Product Add Right to Left See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 13 27 For example ISBN Multiplier Product Product add 0 10 0 0 0 8 0 0 8 6 5 40 6 40 4 i 4 4 132 ISBN uses modulo 11 for its check digit In this case 132 is divisible by 11 so it passes the check digit To set the check digit multiplier scan the following bar code then scan numbers and letters to form the multiplier string from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting Then scan End of Message in the Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting OCR Check Digit Multiplier OCR Programming 13 27 OCR Check Digit Validation Parameter F1h B6h Use OCR Check Digit Validation to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme The following is a list of options
267. nsmission Buffer The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters If the symbol just read overflows the transmission buffer e The digital scanner indicates that it rejected the symbol by issuing three long high beeps e No transmission occurs The data in the buffer is not affected Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer If you scan the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty e A short low high low beep signals that the buffer is empty e No transmission occurs e The buffer remains empty Symbologies 14 37 Code 93 Enable Disable Code 93 To enable or disable Code 93 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 93 01h Disable Code 93 00h Set Lengths for Code 93 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 93 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 93 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing
268. nt only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 17 Table 8 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII ve Code 39 Encode Character A 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L l 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S Ss 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V Vv 1119 W w 1120 X X 1121 Y y 1122 Z Z 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S og The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Table 8 3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 8 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set Continued ALT Keys Keystroke 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z Table 8 4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set GUI Keys Keystrokes 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI O 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI5 Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 19
269. numeric Keyboard continued MMT e IMA f Oh g IMA h MMI i E 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued k l m n o p Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 15 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued MUL q LT r Odin s Oh t MIM u Vv E 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued WLI w OI x TIL y MM Z ON Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 17 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued E 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix F ASCII Character Sets Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table ASCII Value Code 39 Gelee E EE 1000 U CTRL 2 1001 A PIER 1002 B CTRL B 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRL E 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 I CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRLL 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRLN 1015 O CTRL O The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII ae Code 39 Encode Character one 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRL Q 1018 R CTRL R 1019 S CTRL
270. o be ignored Use this as the last character in a template expression Examples for the template 999D Template Incoming data Output 999D 123 PED 123 357298 357 193 193 Skip Until P1 P This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected It can be used in two ways 1 Pict Where e P1 is the Skip Until operator e cis the type of character that triggers the start of output e tis one or more template characters P1 s t Where e P1 isthe Skip Until operator e s is one or more literal string characters see Literal String and on page 13 20 that trigger the start of output e tis one or more template characters OCR Programming 13 23 The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator and the first character in the template should accommodate this trigger Template Incoming data Output P1i PN AA999 123PN9876 PN9876 PN1234 PN1234 X PN3592 PN3592 Skip Until Not P0 P This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in the output stream It can be used in two ways 0 POct Where e PO is the Skip Until Not operator e cis the type of character that triggers the start of output e tis one or more template characters POS t Where e PO is the Skip Until Not operator e s is one or more literal string characters see Literal Strin
271. ode below Enable Code 11 01h Disable Code 11 00h Set Lengths for Code 11 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 11 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 11 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 11 Length Within R
272. ode below to select Standard RTS CTS Hardware Handshaking RTS CTS Option 1 When RTS CTS Option 1 is selected the digital scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS The digital scanner de asserts RTS when the transmission is complete RTS CTS Option 2 When Option 2 is selected RTS is always high or low user programmed logic level However the digital scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time out the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data RTS CTS Option 3 When Option 3 is selected the digital scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission regardless of the state of CTS The digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for CTS to be asserted If CTS is not asserted during this time the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The digital scanner de asserts RTS when transmission is complete None Standard RTS CTS RTS CTS Option 1 RTS CTS Option 2 RTS CTS Option 3 RS 232 Interface 7 13 Software Handshaking This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to or instead of that offered by hardware handshaking There are five options If Softwar
273. ode the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 14 13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental e If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options the digital scanner immediately transmits EAN 13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters If the symbol does not have a supplemental the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 14 13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental The digital scanner transmits UPC EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately e Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode e Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode J NOTE lf you select 978 979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes see Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 14 9 to enable Bookland EAN and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 14 21 e Enable 977 Supplemental Mode e Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode e Enable 491 Supplemental Mode e Enable Smart Supplemental Mode applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously e Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with a 3 digit user defined prefix Set this 3 digit prefix using User Programmable Supplementals on page 14 13 e Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with either of two 3 di
274. ogram this use MultiCode Expression 01 C 02 00 08 End Of Message User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 35 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters Transmit Code ID Character A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code This is useful when decoding more than one code type In addition to any single character prefix already selected the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol Select no Code ID character a Symbol Code ID character or an AIM Code ID character For Code ID Characters see Symbol Code Characters on page B 1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B 3 J NOTE f you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character and enable Transmit No Read Message on page 5 39 the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Symbol Code ID Character 02h AIM Code ID Character 01h None 00h 5 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Prefix Suffix Values Key Category Parameter P 63h S1 62h S2 64h Decimal Value Parameter P 69h S1 68h S2 6Ah You can append a prefix and or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing To set a value for a prefix or suffix scan a four digit number e four bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that corresponds to that value See Table E on page E 1 for the four digit codes When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix set the key catego
275. ola Product and Motorola Inc The Commercial Third Party Software that may be included on this media or included in the Motorola Product is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc unless a separate Commercial Third Party Software License is included in which case your use of the Commercial Third Party Software will then be governed by the separate Commercial Third Party License The Publicly Available Software that may be included on this media or in the Motorola Product is listed below The use of the listed Publicly Available Software is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc as well as the terms and conditions of the license of each Publicly Available Software package Copies of the licenses for the listed Publicly Available Software as well as all attributions acknowledgements and software information details are included below Motorola is required to reproduce the software licenses acknowledgments and copyright notices as provided by the Authors and Owners thus all such information is provided in its native language form without modification or translation The Publicly Available Software in the list below is limited to the Publicly Available Software included by Motorola The Publicly Available Software included by Commercial Third Party So
276. omatic laser shutdown if the scanner s oscillating mirror fails Intercharacter Gap The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code Interleaved 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded Interleaved Bar Code A bar code in which characters are paired together using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second Input Output Ports I O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal s memory Series 9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports UO Ports interface The connection between two devices defined by common physical characteristics signal characteristics and signal meanings Types of interfaces include RS 232 and PCMCIA K Key A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Encryption and Decrypting L LASER Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation The laser is an intense light source Light from a laser is all the same frequency unlike the output of an incandescent bulb Laser light is typically coherent and has
277. onnect for 30 Minutes Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely Radio Communications 4 17 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave mode select a re connect option for when the digital scanner loses its connection with a remote device e Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data The digital scanner auto reconnects when you scan a bar code With this option a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters The digital scanner sounds a decode beep upon bar code scan followed by a connection a page timeout a rejection beep or a transmission error beep Select this option to optimize battery life on the digital scanner and mobile device Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands e Auto reconnect Immediately When the digital scanner loses connection it attempts to reconnect If a page timeout occurs the digital scanner attempts reconnect on a trigger pull Select this option if the digital scanner s battery life is not an issue and you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is transmitted Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands e Disable Auto reconnect When the digital scanner loses connection you must re establish i
278. ont subset first enable the appropriate OCR font s Next scan the following bar code then scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting Then scan End of Message in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting OCR Subset To cancel an OCR subset for OCR A or OCR B scan OCR A variant Full ASCII or OCR B variant Full ASCII For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that character set or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 5 4 and re program the digital scanner OCR Quiet Zone Parameter F1h B7h This option sets the OCR quiet zone The digital scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank space The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option Used with parsers that tolerate slanted characters the End of Field count is roughly a count of 8 for a character width For example if set to 15 then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser Larger end of field numbers require bigger quiet zones at each end of text line To set a quiet zone scan the following bar code then scan a two digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting The range of the quiet zone is 20 99 and the default is 50 indicating a six character width quiet zone OCR Quiet Zone
279. or Code 128 Any Length 14 26 GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 Enable 14 26 ISBT 128 Enable 14 27 ISBT Concatenation Disable 14 28 Check ISBT Table Enable 14 29 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 10 14 29 Code 39 Code 39 Enable 14 30 Trioptic Code 39 Disable 14 30 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy Code Disable 14 31 Code 32 Prefix Disable 14 31 Set Length s for Code 39 2 to 55 14 32 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Aa Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable 14 33 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 14 33 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 14 34 Buffer Code 39 Disable 14 34 Code 93 Code 93 Disable 14 37 Set Length s for Code 93 4 to 55 14 37 Code 11 Code 11 Disable 14 39 Set Lengths for Code 11 4 to 55 14 39 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Disable 14 41 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Disable 14 42 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Enable 14 42 Set Lengths for 2 of 5 14 14 43 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable 14 45 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 14 45 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 14 46 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Discrete 2 of 5 Disable 14 46 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 12 14 47 Codabar NW 7 Codabar Disable 14 49 Set Le
280. or character 2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character The data packet does not support the ECI protocol 3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character The data packet supports the ECI protocol GS1 128 emulation Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules 1 Data packet is a GS1 128 symbol e data is preceded with UCI PDF417 Micro PDF417 0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications Note When this option is transmitted the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECls have been invoked or whether data byte 92pec has been doubled in transmission 1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol Extended Channel Interpretation All data characters 92pec are doubled 2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation no escape character transmission protocol Data characters 92pec are not doubled Note When decoders are set to this mode unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted 3 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 4 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 908 909 5 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 910 911 Example A PDF417 bar code ABCD with no transmission protocol e
281. ore being decoded Table 14 5 Redundancy Level 4 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 1 01h Redundancy Level 2 02h Redundancy Level 3 03h Redundancy Level 4 04h Symbologies 14 79 Security Level Parameter 4Dh The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes which include the Code 128 family UPC EAN and Code 93 Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application e Security Level 0 This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state while providing sufficient security in decoding most in spec bar codes e Security Level 1 This default setting eliminates most misdecodes e Security Level 2 Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes e Security Level 3 If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur select this security level Be advised selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis decoding severely out of spec bar codes Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the digital scanner If
282. ountry Keyboard Types Country Codes continued Italian Windows Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows ASCII Portuguese Brazilian Windows USB Interface 6 7 USB Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec USB CAPS Lock Override This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device When enabled the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows ASCIl keyboard type and can not be disabled Override Caps Lock Key Enable Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable 6 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Ignore Unknown Characters This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Charact
283. ows the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver To install this driver provided by Windows click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice The cradle powers up during this installation 5 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 6 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the digital scanner cradle remain the same If problems occur with the system see Troubleshooting on page 3 2 USB Parameter Defaults Table 6 1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters If any option needs to be changed scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 6 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 6 1 USB Host Default Table Parameter Default see USB Host Parameters USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 6 4 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes North American 6 5 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 6 7 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 6 7 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send 6 8 Emulate Keypad Disable 6 9 USB FN1 Substitution Disable 6 9 Function Key Mapping Disable 6 9 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 6 10 Convert
284. r and invalidate the warranty Wand Emulation Interface 10 3 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 10 1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters beginning on page 10 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 10 1 Wand Emulation Default Table Page Number Parameter Default Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller 10 4 Leading Margin 80 msec 10 5 Polarity Bar High Margin Low 10 6 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 10 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 10 7 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 10 8 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection 10 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller Symbol PDT Terminal MSI Symbol PTC Terminal Telxon J NOTE User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Wand Emulation Interface 10 5 Leading Margin Quiet Zo
285. r change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 39 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Code 39 One Discrete Length Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths Code 39 Length Within Range Code 39 Any Length Symbologies 14 33 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Parameter 30h Enable this feature to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit Enable Code 39 Check Digit 01h Disab
286. r lengths within a specific range J NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types enter a leading zero for single digit numbers e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 128 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 128 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of ch
287. racters Parameter F1 B2h To select the maximum number of OCR characters including spaces per line to decode scan the following bar code then scan a three digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting represents the number of OCR characters to decode Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are ignored The default is 100 OCR Maximum Characters OCR Security Level Parameter F1 2Ah To select the OCR decoding security confidence level scan the following bar code then scan a two digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting represents the level of confidence Greater numbers minimize OCR decoding errors but reduce performance Setting a value that is too high can result in failure to decode Setting a value that is too low can cause decoding errors The range of the security level is 10 90 and the default is 80 OCR Security Level 13 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Subset Parameter F1 AEN Set an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant For example if scanning only numbers and the letters A B and C create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts To set or modify the OCR f
288. racters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character then the digital scanner issues an error beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 7 Keystroke Delay This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec Intra Keystroke Delay When enabled an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and release This sets the Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well Enable Intra Keystroke Delay Disable Intra Keystroke Delay 8 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes on page 8 5ina Microsoft operating system environment Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
289. rd cic endl ware A ee eee ew Boe ees 2 1 WIES es odode eed ngewe babe deed de ved s 4 3 Bluetooth 1 6 1 14 Bluetooth disconnect event 2 2 3 4 4 3 bluetooth keyboard emulation 4 4 Bluetooth security 4 25 bullets gion eh diewade wai EN Peed Gh pawn ees xix C cables MStADG envied a 8 n maiia a 1 6 character set 6 12 7 19 8 13 F 1 CHANGING ug er EE EE ENEE EE ee E 1 10 LEDS orroaka sarana ea EG are annie aie ae ances 1 10 via USB ca dees eee bole Aer ee ee wd 1 7 Charging LED 2 3 codabar bar codes CLSl editing 0 0 0 c eee eee 14 51 CODED aa fend eee enced he eee ele weed 14 49 Es EE 14 49 NOTIS editing 14 51 code 11 bar codes code Ti un Soa AN Ed EL eden deat 14 39 Ee EE 14 39 code 128 bar codes code T29 NEE 14 25 ENEE 14 26 ISBT 128 MEET 14 27 ISBT concatenation 14 28 14 29 ISBT concatenation redundancy 14 29 lengths euer Sid wa eee Aen wares 14 25 code 128 emulation bar codes 14 72 code 39 bar codes buffering 14 34 14 35 check digit verification 14 33 COJE MER 14 30 UASO EE 14 34 IGNQUNS wend dey eae deed ies 14 32 transmit check digit 14 33 code 93 bar codes code 93 A A we tear eared ed dE EE er A 14 37 Ee EE 14 37 code ID character 5 35 code identifiers AIM code De B 3 modifier characters B 4 SYMDO ae SN E ERR SEET EE B 1 code types ADF 222 Ae EEN EE 15 1
290. refore for best performance define small regions when many bar codes are in view or those in view are close together e Use Region elements to improve decode speeds by reducing the image area to search for the target bar code e Specifying Code Type may also improve decode speeds for some code types e Although you can scan parameter bar codes when multicode mode is enabled be aware of the following If the multicode expression defined a region s to scan a parameter bar code you must position the bar code within the first region defined in the expression In some cases this first region is not the center of the image and aiming at the parameter bar code does not result in a successful decode The following examples show the multicode expressions in both hex and decimal formats however in the sample figures the values are decimal Be sure to use the correct base numbering system when creating an expression A region specified as 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 represents a region with coordinates of Top Left 0 0 and Bottom Right 100 50 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 27 Example 1 To decode one Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image even when bar codes of other types are in view as in Figure 5 1 program the expression as follows The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 1C208 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is Spaces are for readability MultiCode Expres
291. rn of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning Bits per Second bps Bits transmitted or received Bluetooth A technology that provides a way to connect and exchange information between devices such as scanners mobile phones laptops PCs and printers over a secure globally unlicensed short range radio frequency Glossary 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Boot or Boot up The process a computer goes through when it starts During boot up the computer can run self diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software bps See Bits Per Second Byte On an addressable boundary eight adjacent binary digits 0 and 1 combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value Bits are numbered from the right 0 through 7 with bit O the low order bit One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character C CDRH Center for Devices and Radiological Health A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation CDRH Class 1 This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification This class is considered intrinsically safe even if all laser output were directed into the eye s pupil There are no special operating procedures for this class CDRH Class 2 No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human e
292. roduct Reference Guide 2 Hook the loop of the lanyard around the screw container inside the battery door latch between the loop guides Loop Guides Screw Container Figure 1 11 Attaching Lanyard 3 Close the battery door latch 4 Tighten the screw Introduction This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions scanning techniques general instructions and tips about scanning and decode ranges Beeper Definitions The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner For additional beeper definitions see Table 2 1 Standard Beeper Definitions Standard Use Low medium high beeps Power up High beep A bar code symbol was decoded if decode beeper is enabled Four long low beeps 1 A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting 2 When communicating with a cradle the cradle acknowledges receipt of data If the acknowledgment is not received this transmission error beep sequence sounds Data may still have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Four short beeps Low battery warning Five low long beeps Conversion or format error Table 2 1 Beeper Seq
293. rse Fih 4Bh Regular 14 75 MicroQR Fih 3Dh Enable 14 75 Aztec Fih 3Eh Enable 14 76 Aztec Inverse F1h 4Dh Regular 14 76 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 4Eh 1 14 77 Security Level 4Dh 0 14 79 Intercharacter Gap Size FOh 7Dh Normal 14 80 Report Version 14 80 Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer 14 81 Abort Macro PDF Entry 14 81 Symbologies 14 7 UPC EAN Enable Disable UPC A Parameter 01h To enable or disable UPC A scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPC A 01h Disable UPC A 00h Enable Disable UPC E Parameter 02h To enable or disable UPC E scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPC E 01h Disable UPC E 00h 14 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable Disable UPC E1 Parameter OCh UPC E1 is disabled by default To enable or disable UPC E1 scan the appropriate bar code below J NOTE UPC E1 is not a UCC Uniform Code Council approved symbology Enable UPC E1 01h Disable UPC E1 00h Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 Parameter 04h To enable or disable EAN 8 JAN 8 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable EAN 8 JAN 8 01h Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 00h Symbologies Enable Disable EAN 13
294. rting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle 1 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Vertical Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle vertically 1 Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage 2 Ensure the convertible mount hook on the front of the cradle is inserted with the hook facing up If not remove and reverse the hook so that it is in position to secure the digital scanner in place See Figure 1 3 on page 1 4 for the location of the convertible mount hook 3 Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1 8 p r Desk Wall Mount A Converter Knob Figure 1 8 Vertical Mount Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Wall Mount Bracket Template For your convenience a wall mount bracket can be purchased from Motorola Use the mounting holes on the Wall Mount Bracket or see Figure 1 9 for a Wall Mount Bracket Template to determine the location of the screw holes For detailed instructions on mounting the cradle refer to the CRO078 S CRO008 S Quick Reference Guide p n vV 72 135874 xx Getting Started 1 13 ww 22 64 Ul GGL D 1 7 in 43 18 mm Figure 1 9 Wall Mount Bracket Template 1 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications The digital scanner can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support
295. ry parameter to 1 then set the 3 digit decimal value See Table E on page E 1 for the four digit codes To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 J NOTE To use Prefix Suffix values first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 37 Scan Prefix 07h Scan Suffix 1 06h Scan Suffix 2 08h Data Format Cancel User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 37 Scan Data Transmission Format Parameter EBh To change the scan data format scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format J NOTE f using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix suffix To set values for the prefix and or suffix see Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 36 Data As Is 00h lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt 01h lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 02h lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 03h lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt 04h 5 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scan Data Transmission Format continued lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt 05h
296. sion 01 C 02 00 08 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x01 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x3b J NOTE The host command SSI SNAPI is for use with hands free base only 0 50 100 0 PDF417 Code A l t l Code 128 Code 50 UPC A Code 0 lll 67890 5 100 Figure 5 1 Multicode Expression Example 1 5 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Example 2a To decode a Code128 Code Type 8 on the top half of the image and a PDF417 Code Type 15 on the bottom half of the image as in Figure 5 2 program the expression as follows The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 2C208R400 100 50 C2015R40 50 100 100 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 02 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 32 64 64 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B J NOTE The host command SSI SNAPI is for use with hands free base only Example 2b In Figure 5 2 if the bottom PDF417 bar code must transmit first reverse the sequence of the two bar codes The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 2C2015R4050 100 100 C208R400 10050 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 02 C 02 00 OF
297. st character for later transmission The leading space is not buffered Decoding a Code 39 symbol with no leading space transmits in sequence all buffered data in a first in first out format plus the triggering symbol See the following pages for further details Select Do Not Buffer Code 39 to transmit all decoded Code 39 symbols immediately without storing them in the buffer Symbologies 14 35 Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store continued This feature affects Code 39 only If selecting Buffer Code 39 we recommend configuring the digital scanner to decode Code 39 symbology only Buffer Code 39 Enable 01h Do Not Buffer Code 39 Disable 00h While there is data in the transmission buffer you cannot select Do Not Buffer Code 39 The buffer holds 200 bytes of information To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer first force the buffer transmission see Transmit Buffer on page 14 36 or clear the buffer Buffer Data To buffer data enable Code 39 buffering and scan a Code 39 symbol with a space immediately following the start pattern e Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer the digital scanner issues a low high beep to indicate successful decode and buffering For overflow conditions see Overfilling Transmission Buffer on page 14 36 e The digital scanner
298. t Reference Guide Appendix B Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers Table Bi Symbol Code Characters Code Character Code Type UPC A UPC E UPC E1 EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 39 Code 32 Codabar Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA Code 11 MSI GS1 128 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 Coupon Code GS1 DataBar Family Matrix 2 of 5 UCC Composite TLC 39 C ill D Z Z Pl A S T O mim OF OF Di gt Chinese 2 of 5 B 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table Bi Symbol Code Characters Continued Code Character Code Type V Korean 3 of 5 X ISSN EAN PDF417 Macro PDF417 Micro PDF417 H Aztec Aztec Rune POO Data Matrix P01 QR Code MicroQR P02 Maxicode P03 US Postnet P04 US Planet P05 Japan Postal P06 UK Postal P08 Netherlands KIX Code P09 Australian Postal POA USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail POB UPU FICS Postal POX Signature Capture Programming Reference B 3 AIM Code Identifiers Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three character string Jem where Flag Character ASCII 93 c Code Character see Table B 2 m Modifier Character see Table B 3 Table B 2 Aim Code Characters Code Character Code Type A Code 39 Code 39 Full
299. t X characters Note that only bar codes for Send Next 1 to 20 appear here and can be scanned multiple times to send values greater then 20 For instance to send the next 28 characters scan Send Next 20 Characters then Send Next 8 Characters Send Data Up To Character Send All Data That Remains Send Next Character Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 3 Characters Send Next 4 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 25 Send Data continued Send Next 5 Characters Send Next 6 Characters Send Next 7 Characters Send Next 8 Characters Send Next 9 Characters Send Next 10 Characters Send Next 11 Characters 15 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Data continued Send Next 12 Characters
300. t manually Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data Auto reconnect Immediately Disable Auto reconnect Out of Range Indicator An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt on page 4 15 and extending the time using the Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 4 15 For example with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the digital scanner loses radio connection when it is taken out of range the digital scanner attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by scanning a Reconnect Attempt Interval When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress If the Reconnect Attempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time such as 30 minutes the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range indicator 4 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner s To Cradle Support Modes of Operation The charging cradle with radio supports two radio communication modes of operation allowing the digital scanner to communicate wirelessly e Point to Point e Multipoint to Point Point to Point Communication In Point to Point communication mode the cradle allows one digital scanner to connect to it at a time In this mode the digital scanner is paired to the cradle either by insertion into the cradle if pairing on contacts is enabled page 4 21 or b
301. tal Scanner Battery The battery is installed in the cordless digital scanner by the factory and resides in a chamber in the digital scanner handle To replace the battery 1 Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner then turn the screw counterclockwise to release the latch 2 Remove the latch 3 Ifa battery is already installed turn the digital scanner upright to slide the battery out Disconnect the battery connector clip Figure 1 6 nserting the Battery 4 With the contacts on the connector clips facing in the same direction attach the new battery s connector clip to the connector clip in the base of the digital scanner 5 Slide the new battery into the battery well and ensure the battery leads are visible The battery should sit securely in the well 6 Attach and close the latch 7 Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner press down gently and turn the screw clockwise to lock the latch in place 1 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Charging the Digital Scanner Battery Fully charge the digital scanner battery before using the digital scanner for the first time To charge the digital scanner battery place the digital scanner in the cradle ensuring that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner touch the contacts on the cradle The battery begins charging when the digital scanner LED indicator starts flashing green A co
302. tal Scanner Management In addition Synapse Adaptive Connectivity allows for connectivity to all of the above plus many non standard interfaces User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications 3 9 Table 3 3 Technical Specifications CR0078 S SR0008 Cradle Continued Item Description Accessories Mounting Options Desktop mount on a wall computer work station or medical cart Power Supplies Power supplies are available for applications that do not supply power over host cable Cradle Signal Descriptions 3 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide The signal descriptions in Table 3 4 apply to the connector on the digital scanner and are for reference only Table 3 4 Cradle Signal Pin outs Synapse eer 1 Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6 2 Power Power Power Power Power Power 3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 4 IBM_A Reserved TxD KeyClock DBP Reserved 5 Reserved Reserved RxD TermData CTS D 6 IBM_B SynData RTS KeyData RTS Jump to Pin 1 7 Reserved Reserved CTS TermClock Reserved D 8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 9
303. th connection established High low beeps Bluetooth disconnection event Note When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned check the host device for receipt of transmitted data It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost Long low long high beeps Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 Long low long high long low Connection attempt was rejected by remote device long high beeps Note In the case of Pairing Methods on page 4 21 the cradle may already be connected to another digital scanner in single Point to Point locked mode or the piconet may be full in Multipoint to Point mode If Pair On Contacts is enabled and the digital scanner that is inserted is already connected to the cradle no beeping occurs 4 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Host Types To set up the digital scanner for communication with a cradle or to use standard Bluetooth profiles scan the appropriate host type bar code below v Cradle Host default Select this host type for digital scanner s to cradle operation The digital scanner must then be paired to the cradle and the cradle communicates directly to the host via the host interface cable connection Serial Port Profile Master Select this host type for
304. the CTS line If after Host Serial Response Time out the CTS line is still asserted the digital scanner sounds a transmit error and any scanned data is lost e When the CTS line is de asserted the digital scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to assert CTS When the host asserts CTS data is transmitted If after Host Serial Response Time out the CTS line is not asserted the digital scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data e When data transmission is complete the digital scanner de asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character e The host should respond by negating CTS The digital scanner checks for a de asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data During the transmission of data the CTS line should be asserted If CTS is de asserted for more than 50 ms between characters the transmission is aborted the digital scanner sounds a transmission error and the data is discarded If the above communication sequence fails the digital scanner issues an error indication In this case the data is lost and must be rescanned If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled Hardware Handshaking takes precedence V NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state 7 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hardware Handshaking continued None Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired Standard RTS CTS Scan the bar c
305. the following formats for Bookland data e Bookland ISBN 10 The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10 digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward compatibility Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode e Bookland ISBN 13 The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with either 978 or 979 as EAN 13 in 13 digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN 13 protocol Bookland ISBN 10 00h Bookland ISBN 13 01h J NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly first enable Bookland EAN using Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 14 9 then select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 14 10 14 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UCC Coupon Extended Code Parameter 55h Enable this parameter to decode UPC A bar codes starting with digit 5 EAN 13 bar codes starting with digit 99 and UPC A GS1 128 Coupon Codes UPCA EAN 13 and GS1 128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code 01h Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code 00h J NOTE See UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 14 13 to control autodiscrimination of the GS1 128 right half of a coupon code Sym
306. the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping 6 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Simulated Caps Lock When enabled the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard s Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert All to Lower Case USB Interface 6 11 Optional USB Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved or changed when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override USB interface defaults Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scann
307. ticode mode e When specifying Region ensure e Coordinates are within range the 0 100 decimal or 0x00 0x64 hexadecimal e Top Left is above Bottom Right Top Left is 0 0 0x00 0x00 hexadecimal and Bottom Right is 100 100 0x64 0x64 hexadecimal e Regions for two or more bar codes do not overlap e When specifying Code Type ensure the digital scanner supports the code type Try decoding a single bar code without using multicode If it does not decode try enabling the bar code type See Chapter 14 Symbologies e Experiment with simpler expressions then add to it until you discover the source of the error For example try the simplest expression see Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions and make sure you can scan a single bar code If so extend the expression by adding a second bar code specifying a region or specifying the code type Verify that the digital scanner can decode this new expression Continue adding to the expression until it fails to decode as expected indicating the source of the error e Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5 26 for additional hints 5 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions The simplest multicode expression is e One bar code of any type anywhere in the image e To program this use MultiCode Expression 01 End Of Message Another simple multicode expression is e One Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image e To pr
308. til the digital scanner senses motion Z NOTE Laser scanning is not applicable in hand held presentation mode Auto Aim If the primary trigger trigger A is set to imager this trigger mode turns on the laser aiming pattern when you lift the digital scanner A trigger pull activates decode processing After 2 seconds of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off Standard Level 00h Auto Aim 09h 5 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Picklist Mode Parameter FOh 92h Picklist mode enables the digital scanner to decode only bar codes that are aligned under the laser crosshair Select one of the following picklist modes for the digital scanner e Disabled Always Picklist mode is always disabled e Enabled in Hand Held Mode Picklist mode is enabled in hand held mode Disabled Always 00h Enabled in Hand Held Mode 01h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 17 Mobile Phone Display Mode Parameter Eih CCh Select Enable Mobile Phone Display Mode to improve bar code reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays Disable Mobile Phone Display Mode 00h Enable Mobile Phone Display Mode 01h 5 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide PDF Prioritization Parameter Eih CFh Enable this feature to delay decoding a 1D bar code Code 128
309. ting 15 49 Keyboard Characters continued du Wil Send AA Send VANTIN Send amp ID Send VARTA Send AAT Send VARTA Send 15 50 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send Send 0 Send Send Send Send 1 Advanced Data Formatting 15 51 Keyboard Characters continued VATA Send 2 UAT Send 3 VANTIN Send 4 IDN A Send 5 TL Send 6 VANTIN Send 7 VARTA Send 8 15 52 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send lt Send gt Send 9 Send Send Send Advanced Data Formatting 15 53 Keyboard Characters continued VATA Send AA Send A du W Send B IAU Send C VATA Send D IM Send E VARTA Send F 15 54 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send H Send J Send L Send G Send
310. tion about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication This chapter also includes programming bar codes to configure the digital scanner xviii Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide e Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the digital scanner and commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted to the host device e Chapter 6 USB Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for USB operation e Chapter 7 RS 232 Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for RS 232 operation e Chapter 8 Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Keyboard Wedge operation e Chapter 9 IBM Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle with IBM 468X 469X POS systems e Chapter 10 Wand Emulation Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Wand Emulation operation e Chapter 11 Scanner Emulation Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Scanner Emulation operation e Chapter 12 123Scan2 PC based scanner configuration tool enables rapid and easy customized setup of Symbol scanners by Motorola e Chapter 13 OCR Programming describes how to set up the digital scanner for
311. tion to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select I 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode an 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability J NOTE Due to the construction of the 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths I 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for 2 of 5 applications 14 44 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 continued 2 of 5 One Discrete Length
312. to Point mode only LED Definitions In addition to beeper sequences the digital scanner communicates with the user using a two color LED display Table 2 2 defines LED colors that display during scanning Table 2 2 Standard Scanner LED Definitions LED Indication Scanning Green Flash A bar code was successfully decoded Red Transmission error or digital scanner malfunction Charging Green Slow Continuous Flash Non critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 8 Green Fast Continuous Flash Digital scanner is charging 1 A slow continuous flash is estimated at 1 flash per second A fast continuous flash is estimated at 2 flashes per second 2 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 2 2 Standard Scanner LED Definitions Continued LED Green Solid Indication Digital scanner is fully charged Red Battery may require pre charge Amber Continuous Flash Critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scann
313. transmission See Actions on page 15 24 e Save the Rule Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 15 8 This places the rule in the top position in the rule buffer e To correct any errors see Erase on page 15 9 to erase criteria actions and entire rules ADF Bar Code Menu Example This section provides an example of how to enter and use ADF rules for scan data An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID part number and destination code into their own Code 128 bar codes The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes placed there by the manufacturer The Code 128 bar codes have the following format MMMMMPPPPPDD Where M Manufacturer ID P Part Number D Destination Code The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID lt CTRL M gt part number lt CTRL P gt and destination code lt CTRL D gt At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code The following rules need to be entered When scanning data of code type Code 128 send the next 5 characters send the manufacturer ID key lt CTRL Ms gt send the next 5 characters send the part number key lt CTRL P gt send the next 2 characters send the destination code key lt CTRL D gt When scanning data of code type UPC EAN send all data send the manufacturer ID key lt CTRL M gt To enter these rules see the following steps Advanced Data Formatting 15 3 Rule
314. uccession prior to selecting other criteria To select all code types do not scan any code type Code 39 Codabar GS1 DataBar 14 GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded Code 128 D20F5 15 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Types continued VAAN UA IATA 2 OF 5 IAN 120F5 VAAN Code 93 UI ANU UPC A TAA UPC E UI EAN 8 UTA EAN 13 Advanced Data Formatting 15 13 Code Types continued KANAAN MSI NTA GS1 128 d Tut UPC E1 d Idi Bookland EAN d 04 Trioptic Code 39 PAA Code 11 OM Code 32 ode 15 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Types continued ISBT 128 Coupon Code TLC 39 UPC EAN Composites GS1 DataBar and EAN128 Composites J NOTE When selecting composite bar codes enable AIM IDs if parsing UPC or EAN composite data or data from an application that uses symbol separators Advanced Data Formatting 15 15 Co
315. uence Low beep 2 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Standard Beeper Definitions Continued Indication Digital scanner detects power when inserted into a cradle Note This feature is enabled by default and can be disabled see Beep on Insertion on page 5 9 Low high low high beeps Out of memory unable to store a new bar code Low high low beeps ADF transmit error High high high low beeps RS 232 receive error Parameter Menu Scanning Long low long high beeps Input error incorrect bar code or Cancel scanned wrong entry incorrect bar code programming sequence remain in program mode High low beeps Keyboard parameter selected Enter value using bar code keypad High low high low beeps Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting Long low long high long low long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space Scan Default Parameters on page 5 4 Image Capture Low beep Snapshot mode started or completed High low beeps Snapshot mode timed out Wireless Operation High low high low beeps Pairing bar code scanned Low high beeps Bluetooth connection established High low beeps Bluetooth disconnection event Note When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned check the host device for receipt of transmitted data It is
316. undancy 14 13 UR cicada ed ER ged Ee 14 7 UPC A preamble 000000ee 14 16 UPC A E E1 check digit 14 14 14 15 UPG E tee ebe 14 7 UPC E preamble 0 00055 14 17 IG CN 14 8 UPU FICS postal 14 65 US planet 14 61 US POSET EE REES E beads 14 61 USB caps lock override 02 6 7 CONVErT CASE 20 eee eee 6 10 country keyboard types 6 5 device type 0 cece eee ees 6 4 Index 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide emulate keypad ee eae 6 8 function key mapping 6 9 keyboard FN 1 sub 6 9 keystroke dea 6 7 optional parameters 6 11 simulated caps lock a na nauau 6 10 unknown characters 6 8 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 14 65 variable PIN code 4 26 wand emulation code 39 full ASCII 00 10 8 convert all bar codes to code 39 10 7 host typeS 10 4 leading margin quiet zone 10 5 polarity A A Ae dan deer ved Auer eae 10 6 unknown characters 10 6 bar codes RS 232 software handshaking 7 13 batch mode stored data 5 10 battery CHANGING eae fees eee Nr NNN eens 1 10 inserting removing 0 eee eee eee 1 9 reconditioning 1 10 shutting oft 1 10 battery reconditioning bar code 1 10 beeper definitions PANNO srra toca doe ad souk En et as 4 3 standa
317. urns green For more information about beeper and LED definitions see Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Aiming When scanning the digital scanner projects a red laser aiming pattern which allows positioning the bar code within its field of view See Decode Ranges on page 2 7 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital scanner and a bar code Figure 2 2 Imager Aiming Pattern If necessary the digital scanner turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code 2 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide To scan a bar code center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern Be sure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the cross pattern 1D bar code 2D bar code vir 9 Figure 2 3 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Pattern The digital scanner can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered The top examples in Figure 2 4 show acceptable aiming options while the bottom examples can not be decoded d W d TEL a En Be 012345 Figure 2 4 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming Scanning 2 7 Decode Ranges Typical Working Ranges Symbol Density Bar Code Type Near Far 5 mil Code 39 0 7 6 6 13 mil 100 UPC 1 2 14 2 5 mil PDF 2 0 4 5 6 6 mil PDF 1 2 6 0 10 mil Data Matrix 1 1 7 2 Figure 2 5 DS6878 SR DS6878 HC DS6878 DL Decode Ranges Typical Working Ranges Symbol Density Bar
318. variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems To allow compatibility in these environments the digital scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable symbologies as per the following chart Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally Scan this code type Transmitted as Code 11 Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Code 39 GS1 DataBar 14 Limited and Expanded Code 128 Coupon Code Code 128 When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled the digital scanner issues Convert Error beeps and transmits no data Convert Newer Code Types Reject Newer Code Types Module Width The standard module width is 20 us For an extremely slow decoder system select 50 us Module Width 20 us Module Width 50 us Module Width Scanner Emulation Interface 11 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Scan the bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39 Convert All To Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion By default any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If this parameter is
319. xample scanning bar codes 0 and 1 inserts a 0 1 second pause 0 and 5 inserts a 0 5 second delay To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Pause Duration Begin New Rule Scan the bar code below to start entering a new rule Begin New Rule Save Rule Scan the bar code below to save the rule Save Rule Advanced Data Formatting 15 9 Erase Use these bar codes to erase criteria actions or rules Erase Criteria And Start Again Erase Actions And Start Again Erase Previously Saved Rule Erase All Rules Quit Entering Rules Scan the bar code below to quit entering rules Quit Entering Rules 15 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Disable Rule Set Use these bar codes to disable rule sets Disable Rule Set 1 Disable Rule Set 2 Disable Rule Set 3 Disable Rule Set 4 Disable All Rule Sets Advanced Data Formatting 15 11 Criteria Code Types Scan the bar codes for all code to be affected by the rule Scan the codes in s
320. xdorf Mode B if CTS is low scanning is disabled When CTS is high scanning is enabled If you scan Nixdorf Mode B without connecting the digital scanner to the proper host it may appear unable to scan If this happens scan a different RS 232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the digital scanner The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning including Set Defaults If you inadvertently select CUTE scan Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 01h on page 5 5 then change the host selection RS 232 Interface 7 5 RS 232 Host Parameters continued Selecting the ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B OPOS terminal enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 7 3 below These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these terminals Table 7 3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters Wincor Wincor Nixdorf Code Type ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti Omron Mode A OPOS JPOS UPC A A A A A A A A UPC E C C C None EAN 8 JAN 8 FF FF B B B FF None EAN 13 JAN 13 F F A A A F A Code 39 C lt len gt None M M M lt len gt C lt len gt 3 Code 39 Full ASCII None None M M None None 3 Codabar N lt len gt None N N N lt len gt N lt len gt None Code 128 L lt len gt None K K K lt len gt L lt len gt 5 12o0f5
321. xposure Character A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function such as a number letter punctuation mark or communications control contained in a message Character Set Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology Check Digit A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded Codabar A discrete self checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters Code 128 A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements Code 3 of 9 Code 39 A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types including all uppercase letters numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters and space The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide while the remaining 6 are narrow Code 93 An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39 Code Length Number of data characters in a b
322. y 0 40 50 0 40 50 70 100 0 0 70 0 A Pi K d PDF417 Code 40 40 Data Matrix Code 100 40 40 Code 128 Code e 65 60 60 Code 128 Code 100 100 65 100 Figure 5 3 Multicode Expression Example 3 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 31 Multicode Mode Concatenation Enable this parameter to transmit multiple decoded bar codes as specified by the Multicode Expression as one bar code Use the Multicode Concatenation Symbology parameter to specify how the concatenated bar codes transmit Disable this to transmit decoded bar codes separately NOTE When using Multicode Mode Concatenation disable Transmit Code ID Character on page 5 35 and check v digits Enable Multicode Mode Concatenation 01h Disable Multicode Mode Concatenation 00h 5 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Multicode Concatenation Symbology Use this parameter to specify how to transmit the concatenated bar codes decoded as specified by the Multicode Expression Multicode Mode Concatenation must be enabled to use this option Concatenation as Code 128 01h Concatenation as PDF417 02h Concatenation as Data Matrix 03h Concatenation as Maxicode 04h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 33 Multicode Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming
323. y e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h Symbologies 14 77 Redundancy Level Parameter 4Eh The digital scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality As redundancy levels increase the digital scanner s aggressiveness decreases Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality Redundancy Level 1 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 14 2 Redundancy Level 1 Codes Code Type Code Length Codabar 8 characters or less MSI 4 characters or less D2of5 8 characters or less l2of5 8 characters or less Redundancy Level 2 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 14 3 Redundancy Level 2 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 3 Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Table 14 4 Redundancy Level 3 Codes Code Type Code Length MSI 4 characters or less D2of5 8 characters or less 12o0f5 8 characters or less Codabar 8 characters or less 14 78 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Redundancy Level 4 The following code types must be successfully read three times bef
324. y scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Communication can be locked unlocked default or in a lock override state see Pairing Modes on page 4 20 In locked mode locking intervals must be set by scanning a connection maintenance interval bar code beginning on page 4 23 To activate this mode of operation scan Point to Point Multipoint to Point Communication In Multipoint to Point communication mode up to three digital scanners can be paired to one cradle To activate this mode the first digital scanner connected to the cradle must scan the Multipoint to Point bar code This mode allows a parameter broadcast page 4 19 feature that forwards parameter bar code settings to all connected digital scanners In this mode programming one digital scanner applies the settings to all connected digital scanners To select Point to Point or Multipoint to Point mode scan the appropriate bar code Multipoint to Point Mode Point to Point Mode Radio Communications 4 19 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only When in multipoint to point mode enable Parameter Broadcast to broadcast all parameter bar codes scanned to all other digital scanners in the piconet If disabled parameter bar codes are processed by the individual digital scanner only and the digital scanner ignores parameters broadcast from other digital scanners or from the cradle Enable Parameter Broadcast Disable Par

DS6878-HC - Sklep SmartMedia

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents